Home

Samsung LN32B650 User's Manual

Contents

1. 33 o D 47 6 L 32 4 ia 34 8 T o aay VUE AVANT VUE LAT RALE 15 7 400 mm r 15 7 400 mm a co ZN VUE ARRIERE REMARQUE Tous les dessins ne sont pas n cessairement des repr sentations l chelle Certaines dimensions peuvent avoir t chang es sans avis Mesurez les dimensions avant d installer votre t l viseur Nous n assumons aucune responsabilit pour les erreurs typographiques ou d impression 2009 Samsung Electronics America Inc Fran ais 78 Cette page est laiss e intentionnellement en blanc
2. HDMI OUT C ble HDMI LPPEECECELECELCECELEELELEL m r TETTE 13 C ble HDMI 1 3 1 Raccordez la prise HDMI IN 1 DVI 2 3 ou 4 du t l viseur la prise de sortie HDMI OUT de l appareil Anynet correspondant l aide du c ble HDMI Branchement la cha ne de cin ma maison Cha ne de cin ma maison Appareil 1 Anynett a a DIGITAL AUDIO IN HDMI OUT HDMI IN HDMI OUT eo amp D C ble optique Cable HDMI 1 3 n P Appareil 2 Anynet Appareil 3 Anynet Appareil 4 Anynet J eS HDMI OUT cee HDMI OUT C Cable HDMI 1 3 Cable HDMI 1 3 Cable HDMI 1 3 1 Raccordez la prise HDMI IN 1 DVI 2 3 ou 4 du t l viseur la prise de sortie HDMI OUT de l appareil Anynet correspondant a l aide du cable HDMI 2 Raccordez la prise d entr e HDMI IN de la cha ne de cin ma maison et la prise de sortie HDMI OUT de l appareil Anynet correspondant l aide d un cable HDMI Branchez le c ble optique entre la prise de sortie DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL du t l viseur et la prise d entr e audio num rique de la cha ne de cin ma maison En suivant les instructions de connexion
3. Home Theater Anynet Device 1 ma DIGITAL AUDIO IN HDMI OUT HDMI IN HDMI OUT E ic i Optical Cable HDMI 1 3 Cable Anynet Device 2 Anynet Device 3 Anynet Device 4 e HDMI OUT HDMI 1 3 Cable HDMI 1 3 Cable 1 Connect the HDMI IN 1 DVI 2 3 or 4 jack on the TV and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet device using an HDMI cable Connect the HDMI IN jack of the home theater and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynett device using an HDMI cable Connect the Optical cable between the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL jack on your TV and the Digital Audio Input on the Home Theater When following the connection above the Optical jack only outputs 2 channel audio You will only hear sound from the Home Theater s Front Left and Right speakers and the subwoofer If you want to hear 5 1 channel audio connect the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL jack on the DVD Satellite Box ie Anynet Device 1 or 2 directly to the Amplifier or Home Theater not the TV Connect only one Home Theater You can connect an Anynett device using the HDMI 1 3 cable Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet functions Anynet works when the AV device supporting Anynet is in the Standby or On status Anynett supports up to 12 AV devices in
4. Image principale Image secondaire Composant 1 2 HDMI1 DVI HDMI2 HDMI3 HDMI4 TV PC Quand la fonction V Chip est activ e le mode ISI ne peut pas tre utilis Si vous mettez le t l viseur hors tension alors qu il est en mode ISI la fen tre ISI ne s affichera pas la remise sous tension L image de la fen tre ISI peut sembler l g rement anormale lorsque l cran principal est utilis pour un jeu ou le karaok Q ISI On Off Vous pouvez activer ou d sactiver la fonction ISI ISI Format Format l ME ma Position Vous pouvez choisir le format de l image secondaire Air c ble Cha ne Position gt J T F71 E Vous pouvez choisir la position de l image ISI En mode Double m ME Position ne peut tre choisi SEE Air C ble Air Cable Choisissez Air ou C ble comme source d entr e de l cran secondaire Cha ne Vous pouvez choisir le canal de l cran secondaire Fran ais 20 a Utilisation du t l viseur comme cran PC Configuration du logiciel sur votre PC sous Windows XP Les param tres d affichage de Windows pour un ordinateur type sont indiqu s ci dessous Les C SRUERS fen tres affich es sur votre PC auront probablement un aspect diff rent selon la version de ee Devon See Sve ee Drag the monitor icons to match the physical arrangement of your monitors
5. Environmental Considerations Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity Stand Swivel Left Right 10 C to 40 C 50 F to 104 F 10 to 80 non condensing 20 C to 45 C 4 F to 113 F 5 to 95 non condensing 20 20 Design and specifications are subject to change without prior notice This device is a Class B digital apparatus For the power supply and Power Consumption refer to the label attached to the product English 70 a Dimensions LN32B650 SS TOP VIEW Ber LINK D oviaunio N 7 n awo Er i 17 6 J 94 7 FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW 7 9 200 mm REAR VIEW NOTE All drawings are not necessarily to scale Some dimensions are subject to change without prior notice Refer to the dimensions prior to performing installation of your TV Not responsible for typographical or printed errors 2009 Samsung Electronics America Inc English 71 LN37B650 A o TOP VIEW D COCO eco 1 LAN 36 5 20 5 FRONT VIEW C 10 0 SIDE VIEW 7 9 200 mm 7 9 200 mm T REAR VIEW Englis NOTE All drawings are not necessarily to scale Some dimensions are subject to change without prior
6. Ifyou display the TV menu in Game Mode the screen shakes slightly Game Mode is not available in regular TV and PC mode While PIP is in operation the Game Mode function cannot be used If the picture is poor when external device is connected to TV check if Game Mode is On Set Game Mode to Off and connect external devices If Game Mode is On Picture mode is automatically changed to Standard and cannot be changed Sound mode is automatically changed to Custom and cannot be changed Adjust the sound using the equalizer The Reset Sound function is activated Selecting the Reset function after setting the equalizer resets the equalizer settings to the factory defaults Se S amp S Q BD Wise Off On Provides the optimal picture quality for SAMSUNG DVD Blu ray and Home Theater products which support BD Wise You can enjoy a richer picture when using them connected to this Samsung TV Connect SAMSUNG products that have BD Wise using an HDMI cable When the BD Wise set to On the picture mode is automatically changed to the optimal resolution BD Wise is available in HDMI mode Q Network Type Network Setup For detailed procedures on setting up options refer to the Setting the Network instructions see pages 30 35 Q V Chip The V Chip feature automatically locks out programs that are deemed inappropriate for children The user must enter a PIN personal ID number before any of the V Chip restrictions ar
7. A Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils Il est galement possible de r gler l antenne en choisissant Outils Commuter sur C ble ou Commuter sur Air A Antenne Prog auto Q Prog auto Air signal d antenne de type air C ble signal d antenne de type c ble Auto signaux d antenne de type air et c ble Au moment de la s lection du syst me de cablodiffusion Cette option choisit le syst me de c blodiffusion STD HRC et IRC d signent diff rents syst mes de c blodistribution Communiquez avec votre c blodistributeur local pour d teminer le type de syst me de c ble de votre r gion La s lection de la source de diffusion est maintenant termin e Une fois tous les canaux m moris s le t l viseur commence liminer les canaux brouill s Supprime les canaux brouill s Puis le menu Auto program s affiche de nouveau Pour arr ter la programmation automatique appuyez sur ENTER C amp Le message Arr ter Prog auto s affiche S lectionnez Oui en appuyant sur la touche lt ou gt puis sur ENTERC amp Q Effacer les canaux brouill s canaux num riques seulement Cette fonction permet d liminer les canaux brouill s une fois la programmation automatique Prog auto termin e Cette proc dure peut prendre de 20 30 minutes Pour arr ter la recherche des canaux brouill s appuyez sur ENTER C pour s lectionner Arr t Appuyez sur la touche lt pour
8. 4 Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour choisir l option de service Actions puis sur ENTER L Actions favorites L information sur le titre favori est affich e Appuyez sur la touche jaune pour configurer l option Actions favorites Sommaire du march Dow Jones NASDAQ et S amp P 500 sont permut s et l index les augmentations ou diminutions et le pourcentage sont affich s Actions et nouvelles Les renseignements du titre favoris les index et les nouvelles financi res sur le Dow Jones NASDAQ et S amp P 500 sont affich s Les cotes des titres sont annonc es avec un retard de 15 minutes au moins Pour quitter le service Actions appuyez sur la touche bleue Pour quitter le service InfoLink appuyez sur la touche EXIT Configuration des articles Favorite Stocks 1 Appuyez sur la touche jaune lorsque l option Actions favorites et Actions et nouvelles est s lectionn e L cran Set Favorite Stocks s affiche Peglez les actions favorites 2 Appuyez sur la touche lt ou gt pour passer Category Appuyer sur la touche A ou Y a pour choisir une cat gorie Appuyez sur la touche ENTER CS AAI Fi AAR L RATION 3 Utilisez la touche A ou Y pour s lectionner un article de titre puis appuyez sur z ARB ABE ASEA BROWN BOVERILT ENTER Le titre s lectionn devient le Actions favorites Le symbole v s affiche a la gauche du nom du titre Appuyez de nouveau sur ENTER pour annuler le param tre Le symbole dispar
9. Not Supported File Format message is displayed If sort key is set to Basic View up to 1000 files can be displayed in each folder The other sort key can display up to 10000 files MP3 files with DRM that have been downloaded from a non free site cannot be played Digital Rights Management DRM is a technology that supports the creation of content the distribution and management of the content in an integrated and comprehensive way including the protection of the rights and interests of the content providers the prevention of the illegal copying of contents as well as managing billings and settlements When moving to a photo loading may take a few seconds At this point the loading icon will appear at the screen If more than 2 PTP devices are connected you can only use one at a time If more than one MSC device is connected some of them may not be recognized If a device requires high power more than 500mA or 5V the USB device may not be supported If an over power Fail add new device USB1 USB2 Power Overload warning message is displayed while you are connecting or using a USB device the device may not be recognized or may malfunction b SBSS8BS8 B S English 38 Using the Remote Control Button in Media Play Menu Button Operations A a Move the cursor and select an item Select the currently selected item While playing a slide show movie or mus
10. Windows et de la carte vid o Toutefois m me si les fen tres semblent diff rentes les m mes donn es de configuration de base s appliquent dans la plupart des cas Dans le cas contraire communiquez avec le fabricant de votre ordinateur ou avec votre d taillant Samsung 1 Cliquez sur Panneau de configuration dans le menu D marrer de Windows 2 Lorsque le panneau de configuration s affiche cliquez sur Apparence et Th mes et la a Eee bo te de dialogue Propri t s de l affichage appara t les 9 Moe pepe E E re 1920 by 1080 pines in np 3 Lorsque le panneau de configuration s affiche cliquez sur Affichage et la bo te de Ure thie device a the piraty monte dialogue Propri t s de l affichage appara t ee GS 4 Allez l onglet Param tres dans la bo te de dialogue Propri t s de l affichage E e R glage correct de la taille r solution Optimale 1920 X 1080 pixels e Sila bo te de dialogue Param tres d affichage comporte une option de fr quence verticale la valeur correcte est 60 ou 60 Hz Dans le cas contraire cliquez sur OK et quittez la bo te de dialogue Display 1 200000 Modes d affichage Si le signal du syst me quivaut au mode de signal standard l cran se r gle automatiquement Si le signal du syst me ne correspond pas au signal standard r glez le mode en vous reportant le cas ch ant
11. m Configuring the Picture Menu m Viewing Picture in Picture m Using Your TV as a Computer PC Display m Setting up the TV with your PC m Configuring the Sound Menu SETUP m Configuring the Setup Menu m Setting the Time 3 m Network Connection m Setting the Network 3 INPUT SUPPORT m Input Menu m Support Menu 3 Media Play USB m Connecting a USB Device m Media Play Function m Sorting the Photo List x m Photo List Option Menu m Viewing a Photo or Slide Show m Slide Show Option Menu m Sorting the Music List m Music List Option Menu m Playing Music m Music Play option Menu m Sorting the Movie List m Movie List Option Menu m Playing a Movie File m Movie Play Option Menu m Using the Setup Menu ANYNET m Connecting Anynet Devices m Setting Up Anynett m Switching between Anynet Device IM RECOIMING ne m Listening through a Receiver Home Theater m Troubleshooting for Anynet InfoLink m Using InfoLink m Using the Weather Service m Using the News Service m Using the Stock Service m InfoLink Setup RECOMMENDATIONS m Troubleshooting m Installing the Stand m Disconnecting the Stand m Assembling the Cables m Wall Mount Kit Specifications VESA m Anti Theft Kensington Lock m Securing the Installation Space m Securing the TV to a Wall or Cabinet m Specificat
12. A position for normal viewing Set the A B switch to the B position to view scrambled channels When you set the A B switch to B you will need to tune your TV to the cable box s output channel which is usually channel 3 or 4 oR o N English 9 al Viewing the Connection Panel The product color and shape may vary depending on the model Rear Panel Cable Television Network POWER INPUT Connects the supplied power cord The location of the POWER INPUT may be different depending on its model HDMI IN 1 DVI 2 3 DVI AUDIO IN R AUDIO L Connects to the HDMI jack of a device with an HDMI output No sound connection is needed for an HDMI to HDMI connection What is HDMI HDMI High Definition Multimedia Interface is an interface that enables the transmission of digital audio and video signals using a single cable The difference between HDMI and DVI is that the HDMI device is smaller in size and has the HDCP High Bandwidth Digital Copy Protection coding feature installed The TV may not output sound and pictures may be displayed with abnormal color when DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box supporting HDMI versions older than 1 3 are connected When connecting an older HDMI cable and there is no sound connect the HDMI cable to the HDMI IN 1 DVI jack and the audio cables to the DVI AUDIO IN R AUDIO L jacks on the
13. Permet de mettre le t l viseur sous tension et hors tension TV Permet de s lectionner directement le mode TV TOUCHES NUM RIQUES Ces touches servent changer de canal Appuyez sur cette touche pour s lectionner des canaux suppl mentaires num riques diffus s par une m me station Par exemple pour s lectionner le canal 54 3 appuyez sur 54 puis sur et sur 3 VOL Appuyez sur cette touche pour augmenter ou r duire le volume SOURCE Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher et choisir les sources vid o disponibles CHLIST Sert afficher la liste des canaux l cran TOOLS Sert s lectionner rapidement les fonctions fr quemment utilis es INFO L Appuyez ici pour utiliser les services de nouvelles de cotes boursi res et de pr visions m t orologiques accessibles gr ce au r seau Samsung TOUCHES DE COULEUR Appuyez sur ces touches dans les menus Liste des canaux Media Play etc MEDIA P Appuyez sur cette touche pour lire des fichiers musicaux des images et des films INFO Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher de l information l cran MTS Appuyez sur cette touche pour choisir entre les modes st r o mono ou diffusion SAP seconde piste audio Appuyez sur ces touches en modes Media Play et Anynett Le Cette t l commande commande l enregistrement sur
14. cran large 16 9 ou agrandi afin de remplir l cran si votre mod le offre cette caract ristique et que les images sont constamment en mouvement L affichage des graphiques et images fixes comme les barres noires des vid os et des missions de t l vision en format standard non agrandi doit se limiter 5 du temps d coute hebdomadaire De plus il faut limiter l affichage d images et de textes fixes comme les rapports boursiers les affichages de jeux vid o les logos des stations les sites Web ou les images graphiques et les sch mas des ordinateurs tel qu indiqu ci dessus et ce pour tous les t l viseurs L affichage d images fixes qui ne respecte pas les directives ci dessus peut causer un vieillissement in gal des crans ACL en y cr ant des images fant mes subtiles mais permanentes Pour viter ce probl me faites varier les missions et les images et regardez principalement des images plein cran en mouvement et non pas des images ou des barres fonc es fixes Dans les mod les d cran plasma qui offrent des caract ristiques de format d image utiliser ces commandes pour obtenir diff rents formats en plein cran Prendre garde au choix des formats et leur dur e d utilisation Le vieillissement in gal de l affichage ACL r sultant du choix et de l utilisation d un format n est pas couvert par la garantie limit e de Samsung les images r manentes en sont galement exclues e Etats Unis seulement L appareil qui ac
15. partir de six positions InfoLink pr d finies Position 1 Position 6 Frangais 61 RECOMMANDATIONS al D pannage Le tableau ci dessous dresse la liste des probl mes courants et sugg re des solutions Si aucun de ces conseils de d pannage ne permet de corriger le probl me communiquez avec le service la client le de Samsung en composant le 1 800 SAMSUNG Probl me Solution possible Image de qualit m diocre Essayez un autre canal R glez l antenne V rifiez tous les branchements de c bles Son de qualit m diocre Essayez un autre canal R glez l antenne Aucune image ou aucun son Essayez un autre canal Appuyez sur la touche SOURCE V rifiez si le t l viseur est branch V rifiez le branchement de l antenne Il n y a pas de son ou le son est trop bas alors que le volume est r gl au maximum Dans un premier temps v rifiez le volume pour les l ments branch s sur votre t l viseur r cepteur de diffusion num rique DTV DVD r cepteur de diffusion par c ble magn toscope etc R glez ensuite le volume du t l viseur en cons quence Pour d sactiver la transmission du contenu m dia partir d un S lect le haut parleur L image roule verticalement V rifiez tous les branchements des c bles La qualit de l image laisse d sirer Effectuez l essai d image dans le menu Autodiagnostic Le son laisse d sirer Effectuez l e
16. vous l avez arr t 1 2 3 Appuyez sur la touche lt ou gt pour s lectionner dans la section Liste des fichiers celui que vous souhaitez lire en continu Appuyez sur la touche gt Lecture ENTER C4 Appuyez sur la touche bleu pour s lectionner Lecture continue reprendre une lecture La lecture du film commence au moment de son interruption Si la fonction Rappel lecture cont Film a t r gl e sur On dans le menu de Setup un message clair s affiche lorsque vous reprenez la lecture du film Fran ais 52 F Options du menu Lecture de film Options du menu Lecture de film a Q Modo rep On Off Vous pouvez lire des fichiers film r p tition p s curit Q R glage de l image R glage du son Vous pouvez choisir les r glages de l image et les r glages sonores D pl 4P R glage Quitter Q Image Format Ajustement Lecture d une vid o la taille de l cran du t l viseur Original Lecture d une vid o sa taille d origine Q R glage des sous titres Vous pouvez r glez le sous titrage du film Sous titres On Off Vous pouvez activer ou d sactiver le sous titrage du film Dimension des sous titres Petit Standard Grand Vous pouvez modifier la taille des sous titres Synchronis sous titres Vous pouvez modifier la synchronisation des sous titres R tablir synchr s titres Vous pouvez r tablir la synchronisation r gl e des s
17. Auto Program For detailed procedures on using the Auto Program refer to the Channel Menu instructions see page 13 Channel List Option Menu in Programmed You can view modify or delete a reservation Press the TOOLS button to use the option menu y 15 5m o 2 z El z 3 3 2 Change Info Select to change a viewing reservation Cancel Schedules Select to cancel a viewing reservation Information Select to view a viewing reservation You can also change the reservation information Select All Select all reserved programs English 15 PICTURE You can configure various picture options such as the picture mode aspect ratio and color to suit your personal preferences Configuring the Picture Menu Q Mode You can select the type of picture which best corresponds to your viewing requirements A Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu You can also set the picture mode by selecting Tools Picture Mode Mode Standard anpid Backlight Contrast 95 Dynamic Brightness 45 Selects the picture for increased definition in a bright room ae 4 Tint G R G50 R50 Standard Advanced Settings Selects the picture for the optimum display in a normal environment Natural Selects the picture for an optimum and eye comfortable display Natural is not available in PC mode Movie Selects the picture for viewing movies in a dark room Q Backlight Contrast Brightness Sharpne
18. BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed i e this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution licence including the GNU Public Licence Imaginez les possibilit s Merci d avoir achet un produit Samsung Pour obtenir un service complet veuillez enregistrer votre produit www samsung com register Mod le N de s rie me 630 640 650 SET Q Remarques importantes sur la garantie relative au format de l image du t l viseur Voir le bon de garantie pour avoir plus d information sur les conditions de garantie Le format cran large des crans ACL 16 9 soit le rapport hauteur largeur de l image est con u principalement pour les vid os plein cran cran large Les images affich es devraient tre en format
19. Cam scope PC DVI DVI PC TV IPTV Blu ray HD DVD DMA Entrez l appareil connect aux prises d entr e pour vous faciliter la s lection de la source d entr e Lorsqu un PC ayant une r solution de 1920 x 1080 60Hz est branch au port d entr e HDMI IN1 DVI vous devez r gler le mode HDMI1 DVI DVI PC dans l option Entrer le nom du mode Entr e il Support technique Q Autodiagnostic Essai d image Si vous croyez qu il y a un probl me d image effectuez un essai d image V rifiez le mod le des couleurs l cran pour voir si le probl me persiste e Qui Sila mire ne s affiche pas ou s il y a du bruit dans la mire s lectionnez Oui Il est possible que votre t l viseur soit d fectueux Communiquez avec le centre d appel Samsung pour obtenir de l assistance e Non Sila mire s affiche correctement s lectionnez Non Il est possible qu un appareil externe soit d fectueux Veuillez v rifier les connexions Si le probl me persiste consultez le guide d utilisation de l appareil externe Autodiagnostic Mise jour du logiciel Contacter Samsung anbiuysa yoddng Autodiagnostic Essai d image gt Essai de son D p C Intro D Retour Fran ais 36 Essai de son Si vous croyez qu il y a un probl me de son effectuez un essai de son Pour v rifier le son vous pouvez faire jouer dans le t l viseur une m lodie pr enregistr e Si les haut parleurs du t l viseur n mette
20. J Appuyez sur la touche INFO pour afficher l information i A ms Q Supp s curit ll est possible de retirer le dispositif du t l viseur de fa on s re i Lecture d un fichier film Lecture d un fichier film 1 Appuyez sur la touche Y pour s lectionner la section Liste des fichiers EX lt 00 00 01 00 05 30 7 2 Appuyez sur la touche ou pour choisir le fichier film lire aea 3 Appuyez sur la touche gt Lecture ENTER C Le fichier s lectionn est lu Me S1 Z Le fichier s lectionn est affich en t te de liste avec sa dur e de lecture 7 LC Lorsqu elle n est pas d tect e au d but du fichier la dur e de lecture d un EUR fichier film peut s afficher sous la forme 00 00 00 Vous pouvez lire des fichiers jeux multim dias passionnants mais la fonction East EPST CES Fer de jeux n est pas prise en charge S Fran ais 50 Formats de sous titre pris en charge Nom Extension de fichier Format MPEG 4 time based text ttxt XML SAMI Smi HTML SubRip srt string based SubViewer sub string based Micro DVD Sub ou txt string based Formats de fichiers films compatibles Extension de z AA Compression z fichier Conteneur D codeur vid o d compression audio R solution Divx 3 11 4 x 5 1 6 0 720x576 XviD MP3 1920x1
21. L emplacement du verrou Kensington peut varier en fonction du mod le COMPONENT IN 1 2 AV IN 1 A brancher a une composante vid o audio La prise d entr e de composante COMPONENT IN 1 sert galement de prise d entr e audio vid o AV IN 1 Branchez le c ble vid o la prise COMPONENT IN 1 Y VIDEO et le cable audio aux prises audio droite et gauche COMPONENT IN 1 R AUDIO L Sile magn toscope est de type mono non st r o il faut utiliser un connecteur en Y non fourni pour effectuer les connexions aux prises d entr e audio droite et gauche du t l viseur Il est galement possible de brancher le cable la prise R Si le magn toscope fonctionne en st r o deux c bles distincts doivent tre branch s amp La couleur de la prise d entr e AV IN 1 Y VIDEO vert ne correspond pas la couleur du c ble vid o jaune PC IN PC AUDIO connecter aux prises de sortie audio et vid o de votre PC Si votre ordinateur prend en charge le branchement HDMI vous pouvez relier cette prise aux bornes HDMI IN 1 DVI 2 3 ou 4 Si votre ordinateur prend en charge un branchement DVI vous pouvez relier cette prise la borne HDMI IN 1 DVI DVI AUDIO IN R AUDIO L DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL connecter un appareil audionum rique tel que le r cepteur de la cha ne de cin ma maison Lorsqu une cha ne audionum rique est branch e la prise DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL baissez le volu
22. PIN Personal Indentification Number WPS will automatically configure the SSID and WPA key in either mode If the device isn t certified it may not connect to the TV via the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter English 32 E Setting the Network Q Network Type Select Cable or Wireless as the method to connect to the network The menu is activated only if the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter is connected Cable Network Setup Connect to the network using a cable V Chip Caption Melody Medium Wireless Energy Saving Off Connect to the network wirelessly k Network Type Cable Q Network Setup Cable Network Setup when Network Type is set to Cable Please check if the LAN cable is connected e Internet Protocol Setup Auto Setup Manual Setup e Network Test You can test or confirm the network connection status after setting up the network When unable to connect to a wired network If your Internet service provider has registered the MAC address of the device used to connect to the Internet for the first time and authenticates the MAC address each time you connect to the Internet your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet as the MAC address differs from that of the device PC In this case ask your Internet service provider about the procedures to connect devices other than your PC such as your TV to the Internet If your Internet service provider requires an ID or password to connect to the
23. Press the gt Play ENTER C button Only the selected file is played Playing movie continuously Resume Play If you exit the playing movie function the movie can be played later from the point where it was stopped 1 2 3 Select the movie file you want to play continuously by pressing the lt or gt button to select it from the File List Section Press the gt Play ENTER C button Select Play Continuously Resume Play by pressing the Blue button The Movie will begin to play from where it was stopped If Continuous Movie Play Help function is set On in the Setup menu a pop up message will appear when you resume play a movie file English 52 i Movie Play Option Menu Movie Play Option Menu Q Repeat Mode On Off You can play movie files repeatedly Q Picture Setting Sound Setting You can configure the picture and sound settings Move 4b Adjust Q Picture Size Fit Play video at the TV screen size Original Play video at the original size Q Caption Setting You can set the captions for the movie Caption On Off You can turn the captions for the movie on or off Caption Size Small Standard Large You can change the font size of the captions Caption Sync You can adjust the caption sync Caption Sync Reset You can reset the adjusted caption sync Q Information The movie file information is displayed Q Safe Remove You c
24. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License or any later version applies to it you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of the GNU General Public License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used that proxy s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions However no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version Disclaimer of Warranty THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED
25. est branch Le message Connexion e La t l commande ne peut tre utilis e pendant la configuration d Anynet ou pour permuter vers l appareil Anynett s affiche un mode de visionnement l cran e Utiliser la t l commande lorsque le r glage d Anynet ou la permutation vers le mode de visionnement sont termin s L appareil Anynet ne lit pas e Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser la fonction lecture lorsque le mode Plug amp Play est en cours d ex cution L appareil branch n est pas e V rifier si l appareil prend en charge les fonctions Anynet affich V rifier si le cable HDMI 1 3 est bien branch e V rifier si la fonction Anynet HDMI CEC est r gl e Marche dans le menu Configuration d Anynet Rechercher les appareils Anynet nouveau Seul le cable HDMI 1 3 permet de brancher un appareil Anynett Certains cables HDMI ne prennent pas en charge des fonctions Anynet e S il ya interruption suite une anomalie par exemple si le c ble HDMI ou le cordon d alimentation est d connect ou s il y a une panne de courant r p ter le balayage de d tection L mission ne peut pas tre e V rifier si la prise d antenne de l appareil enregistreur est branch e correctement enregistr e Le son du t l viseur ne sort e Brancher le cable optique entre le t l viseur et le r cepteur pas par le r cepteur Fran ais 58 InfoLink al Utilisation du service InfoLink Vous pouvez consul
26. gl e TV La touche e fonctionne uniquement en mode d enregistrement B 2 amp Vous ne pouvez pas commander les appareils Anynet l aide des touches du t l viseur Seule la t l commande du t l viseur permet de commander les appareils Anynet B B 2 ll est possible que la t l commande du t l viseur ne fonctionne pas dans certaines conditions Le cas ch ant s lectionnez a nouveau l appareil Anynet Les fonctions Anynet ne fonctionnent pas avec des produits d autres marques Les fonctions des touches lt lt et p gt peuvent varier selon l appareil a Enregistrement AMiynet Regarder t l viseur ll est possible d enregistrer une mission t l vis e l aide d un enregistreur Samsung 1 Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS Appuyez sur la touche ENTER C pour s lectionner la fonction Anynet HDMI CEC 2 Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour s lectionner Recording Immediately et appuyez sur la touche ENTER C L enregistrement d marre Lorsque plus d un appareil d enregistrement est branch Lorsque plusieurs appareils d enregistrement sont branch s ils sont num r s Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour s lectionner un appareil d enregistrement puis sur ENTER C L enregistrement d marre amp Si l appareil d enregistrement ne s affiche pas S lectionnez Liste appareils et appuyez sur la touche rouge pour rechercher les appareils 3 Appuyez
27. is switched to the selected device ory Only when you set Anynet HDMI CEC to On in the Application menu the Device List menu appears Switching to the selected devices may take up to 2 minutes You cannot cancel the Ale se ei operation during the switching operation The time required to scan for devices is determined by the number of connected devices When the device scan is complete the number of devices found are not displayed Although the TV automatically searches the device list when the TV is turned on via the power button devices connected to the TV may not always be automatically displayed in the device list Press the red button to search for the connected device If you have selected external input mode by pressing the SOURCE button you cannot use the Anynett function Make sure to switch to an Anynet device by using the Device List Aynet Setup Se Ses B Anynet Menu The Anynet menu changes depending on the type and status of the Anynet devices connected to the TV Anynet Menu Description View TV Anynet mode changes to TV broadcast mode Device List Shows the Anynett device list Shows the connected device menus E g If a DVD recorder is connected the disc menu of the DVD recorder will appear Shows the play menu of the connected device E g Ifa DVD recorder is connected the play menu of the DVD recorder will appear Starts recording immediately using the recorder This i
28. la garantie limit e originale et une facture dat e en tant que preuve d achat doivent tre pr sent es au centre de r paration Le transport de l appareil au et partir du centre de r paration demeure la responsabilit de l acheteur Les conditions couvertes ne sont limit es qu aux vices de mat riaux et de fabrication dans des conditions d utilisation normale Sont exclues notamment les dispositions pr cis es l origine pour le service domicile ou sur place les dur es de r paration minimale et maximale les changes ou remplacements les accessoires les options les extensions ou les produits remplac s p riodiquement Pour obtenir le nom d un centre de r paration agr Samsung composez sans frais Aux tats Unis 1 800 SAMSUNG 1 800 726 7864 Au Canada 1 800 SAMSUNG Q Pr cautions prendre durant l affichage d une image fixe Une image fixe peut causer des dommages irr m diables l cran du t l viseur e Nraffichez pas d image fixe sur l cran ACL pendant plus de deux heures cela pourrait causer une image r manente Cela pourrait provoquer une r manence de l image l cran Cette remanence de l image est galement appel e br lure de l cran Pour viter une telle r manence de l image l cran r duisez la luminosit et le contraste de ce dernier lorsque vous laissez une image fixe affich e Afficher l cran ACL du t l viseur en format 4 3 pendant une longue p riode peut laiss
29. les enregistreurs Samsung dot s de la fonction Anynet ON OFF 5 Appuyez sur la touche ON OFF pour activer et d sactiver le r tro clairage Lorsque la t l commande est activ e et que vous appuyez sur une de ses touches ces derni res sont r tro clair es pendant un moment L utilisation de la t l commande lorsque la touche de r tro clairage ON OFF est r gl e marche r duit la dur e de vie des piles PRE CH Permet de revenir au canal cout pr c demment MUTE x Appuyez sur cette touche pour couper le son temporairement V CHA Appuyez sur cette touche pour changer de canal MENU Affiche le menu l cran principal FAV CH Appuyez sur cette touche pour naviguer entre les canaux favoris RETURN Permet de retourner au menu pr c dent HAUTA BAS Y GAUCHE DROITE ENTER C4 Sert s lectionner des articles de menus affich s et modifier les valeurs des menus EXIT Appuyez sur cette touche pour quitter un menu SRS Appuyez sur cette touche pour s lectionner le mode SRS TruSurround HD P SIZE Permet de choisir le format de l image CC Appuyez sur cette touche pour r gler la fonction de sous titrage Fran ais 4 ON OFF MUTE Taipe VOL source CH SAMSUNG al Insertion des piles dans la t l commande 1 Soulevez le couvercl
30. seuls les fichiers musicaux du dossier choisi sont affich s amp I n est pas possible de r gler les fichiers favoris dans le classement Aff de base Q Titre Les fichiers musicaux sont class s par ordre de symbole num ro alphab tique sp cial et affich s Q P artis Les fichiers musicaux sont class s par artiste par ordre de symbole num ro alphab tique sp cial Ambiance nergique Rythm Triste Stimulant Calme Non class s Les fichiers musicaux sont class s par ambiance Il est possible de modifier l information d ambiance de la musique Q Genre Les fichiers musicaux sont class s par genre Q Dossier Les fichiers musicaux sont class s par dossier S il y a beaucoup de dossiers dans le dispositif USB les fichiers sont affich s dans l ordre dans chacun des dossiers Le fichier musical dans le dossier source est affich en premier et les autres dans l ordre alphab tique par nom Q P pr f k k kK Les fichiers musicaux sont class s par pr f rence Favori Il est possible de modifier les pr f rences des fichiers musicaux Modification du r glage favori Choisissez le fichier musical d sir dans la section Liste des fichiers et appuyez ensuite r p tition sur la touche verte jusqu l affichage du r glage d sir Jusqu 3 toiles peuvent tre s lectionn es Les toiles servent des fins de regroupement seulement Par exemple un m dia trois toiles n a pas priori
31. ue on Le proc d pour PBC NIP est le m me que celui d crit plus haut Reportez vous y si la Code de s curit est d j configur e Essayez de nouveau si la connexion ne fonctionne pas Selectionnez du r seau D p C Intro D Retour Frangais 34 Ad Hoc Vous pouvez brancher un appareil portatif sans point d acc s l aide de l adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung par un r seau poste poste Comment se brancher une nouvelle connexion Ad hoc 1 Choississez S lectionnez un r seau La liste des appareils s affiche 2 Dans la liste des appareils appuyez sur la touche bleue de la t l commande ou s lectionnez Ad hoc Le message La fonctionnalit du syst me de r seau existant La fonctionnalit du syst me de r seau existant est peut tre restreinte Souhaitez vous changer la connexion e A AE e connexion r seau r seau s affiche 3 Inscrivez le Nom du r seau SSID g n r et la Code de s curit dans l appareil que vous souhaitez brancher Branchement d un appareil Ad hoc existant 1 Choississez S lectionnez un r seau La liste des appareils s affiche 2 Choisissez l appareil ajouter dans la liste 3 Siune cl de s curit t utilis e saisissez la de nouveau Si le r seau ne fonctionne pas normalement v rifiez de nouveau le Nom du r seau SSID et la Code de s curit Une Code de s curit erron e peut expliquer le mauvais fonctionnement du r se
32. un c blos lecteur ou un r cepteur satellite bo tier d codeur comporte une version HDMI ant rieure 1 3 Lorsque vous branchez un c ble HDMI dot d une version ant rieure et qu aucun son n est mis branchez le c ble HDMI la prise HDMI IN 1 DVI et les c bles audio aux prises DVI AUDIO IN R AUDIO L situ es l arri re du t l viseur Le cas ch ant communiquez avec la soci t qui a fourni le lecteur DVD Blu ray le c blos lecteur ou le r cepteur satellite bo tier d codeur afin de confirmer la version HDMI puis demandez une mise niveau Les c bles HDMI autres que ceux de version 1 3 peuvent provoquer un papillotement ou une absence d image Utilisez la prise d entr e HDMI IN 1 DVI pour faire une connexion DVI vers un appareil externe Utilisez un c ble DVI vers HDMI ou un adaptateur DVI HDMI DVI vers HDMI pour la connexion vid o et les prises DVI AUDIO IN R AUDIO L pour la sortie audio II faut utiliser la prise d entr e HDMI IN 1 DVI dans le cas d un branchement au c ble HDMI DVI ANT IN Sert brancher une antenne ou au service de c blodiffusion Fran ais 10 VERROU KENSINGTON Le verrou Kensington en option est un dispositif servant immobiliser un appareil dans un endroit public Si vous souhaitez utiliser un dispositif de verrouillage communiquez avec le magasin o vous avez achet le t l viseur
33. 2 2 tS tS You must use the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter WISO9ABGN to use a wireless network Samsung s Wireless LAN adapter is sold separately The WISO9ABGN Wireless LAN adapter is offered by select retailers Ecommerce sites and Samsungparts com To use a wireless network your TV must be connected to a wireless IP sharer If the wireless IP sharer supports DHCP your TV can use a DHCP or static IP address to connect to the wireless network Samsung s Wireless LAN adapter supports IEEE 802 11A IEEE 802 11B IEEE 802 11G IEEE 802 11N If the wireless IP sharer allows you to turn the Ping connection function on off turn it on Select a channel for the wireless IP sharer that is not currently being used If the channel set for the wireless IP sharer is currently being used by another device nearby this will result in interference and communications may fail If you apply a security system other than the systems listed below it will not work with the TV When applying the security key for the AP wireless IP sharer only the following is supported 1 Authentication Mode OPEN SHARED WPAPSK WPA2PSK 2 Encryption Type WEP TKIP AES When applying the security key for the Ad hoc mode only the following is supported 1 Authentication Mode SHARED WPANONE 2 Encryption Type WEP TKIP AES If your AP supports WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup you can connect to the network via PBC Push Button Configuration or
34. 45 a Classement de la liste de musique You can sort music files in the Music List by a particular standard 1 Appuyez sur la touche MEDIA P 2 Appuyez sur la touche lt ou pour choisir Music puis sur ENTER C 3 Appuyez sur la touche A pour passer la section Cl de tri 4 Appuyez sur la touche lt ou pour choisir un crit re de classement Aff de base Titre P artis Ambiance Genre Dossier P pr f Les fichiers musicaux sont class s selon le crit re nouvellement choisi 5 Appuyez sur la touche W pour passer la section Liste des fichiers Appuyez sur la ESEIA Ua R gl ew Retour touche gt Lecture ENTER C amp pour lancer la lecture musicale dans l ordre choisi par l utilisateur Pour passer au groupe pr c dent ou suivant appuyez sur la touche lt lt REW ou gt gt FF L information relative la musique est r gl e automatiquement L information Mood extraite d un fichier musical peut tre diff rente de ce a quoi s attend l utilisateur Vous pouvez modifier l ambiance et les pr f rences S il n y a pas de titre pour un fichier musical le nom du fichier est affich S il n existe aucune information sur l artiste l album l ann e ou le genre l l ment correspondant affich est vierge Q Aff de base Affiche les dossiers du dispositif de m moire USB Lorsque vous choisissez un dossier et que vous appuyez sur la touche ENTER G4
35. 544 247 5 960 037 6 023 490 5 878 080 and under US Published Patent Application No 2001 44713 A1 This license is limited to private non commercial use by end user consumers for licensed contents No rights are granted for commercial use The license does not cover any product unit other than this product unit and the license does not extend to any unlicensed product unit or process conforming to ISO IEC 11172 3 or ISO IEC 13818 3 used or sold in combination with this product unit The license only covers the use of this product unit to encode and or decode audio files conforming to the ISO IEC 11172 3 or ISO IEC 13818 3 No rights are granted under this license for product features or functions that do not conform to the ISO IEC 11172 3 or ISO IEC 13818 3 e Other countries The product unit accompanying this user manual is licensed under certain intellectual property rights of certain third parties This license is limited to private non commercial use by end user consumers for licensed contents No rights are granted for commercial use The license does not cover any product unit other than this product unit and the license does not extend to any unlicensed product unit or process conforming to ISO IEC 11172 3 or ISO IEC 13818 3 used or sold in combination with this product unit The license only covers the use of this product unit to encode and or decode audio files conforming to the ISO IEC 11172 3 or ISO IEC 13818 3 No rights are granted under this l
36. 6 mm With stand 44 0 x 10 9 x 28 5 inch 1118 5 x 277 0 x 724 5 mm Weight Without Stand 43 0 lbs 19 5 Kg With Stand 54 0 lbs 24 5 Kg Environmental Considerations Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity Stand Swivel Left Right 10 C to 40 C 50 F to 104 F 10 to 80 non condensing 20 C to 45 C 4 F to 113 F 5 to 95 non condensing 20 20 English 68 Model Name LN52B630 Screen Size 52 inches Diagonal 52 0 inches measured diagonally PC Resolution Optimum 1920 x 1080 60 Hz Sound Output 10W x2 Dimensions WxDxH Body 49 7 x 3 1 x 32 3 inch 1261 5 x 79 9 x 819 3 mm With stand 49 7 x 12 0 x 34 5 inch 1261 5 x 305 0 x 877 2 mm Weight Without Stand 56 4 lbs 25 6 Kg With Stand 68 3 lbs 31 Kg Environmental Considerations Operating Temperature 10 C to 40 C 50 F to 104 F Operating Humidity 10 to 80 non condensing Storage Temperature 20 C to 45 C 4 F to 113 F Storage Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Stand Swivel Left Right 20 20 Model Name LN40B640 Screen Size 40 inches Diagonal 40 0 inches measured diagonally PC Resolution Optimum 1920 x 1080 60 Hz Sound Output 10W x2 Dimensions WxDxH Body 40 9 x 3 1 x 25 1 inch 1040 0 x 79 3 x 638 0 mm With stand 40 9 x 10 0 x 27 4 inch 1040 0 x 253 0 x 695 4 mm W
37. 635 74 984 136 750 1680 x 1050 65 290 59 954 146 250 1280 x 720 52 500 70 000 89 040 VESA GTF 1280 x 1024 74 620 70 000 128 943 J VESA DMT BTV CEA 1920 x 1080p 67 500 60 000 148 500 Frangais 21 a Configuration du t l viseur avec un PC Pr r glage Appuyez sur la touche SOURCE pour s lectionner le mode PC Q R glage Auto Utilisez la fonction R glage Auto afin que le t l viseur r gle automatiquement les signaux vid o qu il re oit Cette fonction r gle galement automatiquement les param tres les fr quences et les positions A Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils Il est galement possible de r gler l ajustement automatique en choisissant Outils R glage Auto Cette fonction n est pas disponible en mode num rique DVI Q cran Grain Affin Le but du r glage de la qualit de l image est d liminer ou de r duire le bruit de l image Si le bruit n est pas limin en effectuant uniquement une syntonisation fine r glez la fr quence le mieux possible Grain puis proc dez une syntonisation de nouveau Une fois le bruit r duit r ajustez l image pour la centrer sur l cran Position de l ordinateur R gler la position de l cran de l ordinateur s il ne correspond pas celui du t l viseur Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour r gler la position verticale Appuyez sur la touche lt ou pour r gler la position horizontale R tablir l image V
38. Corresponding Source The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made If you convey an object code work under this section in or with or specifically for use in a User Product and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term regardless of how the transaction is characterized the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Installation Information But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product for example the work has been installed in ROM The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service warranty or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network Corresponding Source conveyed and Installation Information provided in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented and
39. Eric Young s and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed If this package is used in a product Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation online or textual provided with the package Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The word cryptographic can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related 4 lf you include any Windows specific code or a derivative thereof from the apps directory application code you must include an acknowledgement This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG AS IS AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING
40. Lisse R gle Auto Motion Plus 120Hz sur maximum Personnel R gle le niveau de r duction du flou et de l effet de saccade selon votre pr f rence R duction du flou R gle le niveau de r duction du flou des sources vid o R d effet de flou R gle le niveau de r duction de l effet de saccade des sources vid o pendant le visionnement d un film R gler R tablit les param tres personnalis s e D mo Affiche la diff rence entre l activation et la d sactivation du mode Auto Motion Plus 120Hz R initialisation de l image R initial mode image Effacer Ram ne tous les r glages d image aux valeurs par d faut R initial mode image Les valeurs d images en cours sont ramen es aux r glages par d faut Fran ais 19 Visionnement Image sur Image ll est possible d utiliser la fonction ISI pour visionner simultan ment le syntoniseur t l et une M lodie Moyen source vid o externe Cet appareil est dot d un syntoniseur int gr qui ne permet pas la DE fonction ISI dans le m me mode Consulter la section Param tres ISI ci dessous pour les d tails A Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils Il est galement possible de configurer le mode ISI en choisissant Outils ISI amp Si vous choisissez le son de l image ISI veuillez vous reporter la rubrique Configuration du menu Son voir page 24 Param tres ISI ISI o S S 2 a E 8
41. MENU VOL voa D LN40B630 LN46B630 LN52B630 LN40B640 LN46B640 LN55B640 SOURCE G ALIMENTATION Appuyez sur cette touche pour mettre le t l viseur sous tension et hors tension T MOIN D ALIMENTATION Clignote puis s arr te lorsque le t l viseur est allum S allume en mode de veille V CH A Appuyez sur cette touche pour changer de canal Dans le menu l cran utiliser les touches V CH A de la m me mani re que les touches Y et de la t l commande voL Appuyez sur cette touche pour augmenter ou r duire le volume Dans le menu l cran les touches VOL ont la m me fonction que les touches lt et gt de la t l commande MENU Appuyez sur cette touche pour afficher l cran le menu des fonctions du t l viseur SOURCE 4 Appuyez sur cette touche pour passer d une source d entr e une autre Dans le menu l cran cette touche a la m me fonction que la touche ENTER C4 de la t l commande CAPTEUR DE LA T L COMMANDE Dirigez la t l commande vers cet endroit du t l viseur HAUT PARLEURS Fran ais 3 il Affichage de la telecommande Vous pouvez utiliser la t l commande une distance maximale du t l viseur d environ 7 m Une lumi re intense peut affecter le bon fonctionnement de la t l commande La couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du mod le POWER
42. Masque de sous r seau 3 R glez l option R glage pr Internet R glage manuel RE Serveur DNS 4 Configurez les fonctions Adresse IP Masque de sous r seau Passerelle et Serveur DNS D p C Intro 2 Retour Appuyez sur les touches num riques de la t l commande pour configurer le r seau manuellement 5 S lectionnez Test du r seau pour v rifier la connectivit du r seau Configuration du r seau sans fil Le menu est activ uniquement si l adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung est branch e R glage pr Internet R glage autom R glage manuel e Test du r seau I est possible de tester ou de confirmer l tat de la connexion r seau apr s avoir configur le r seau Fran ais 33 amp Impossible de se connecter un point d acc s Votre t l viseur n arrive pas trouver le point d acc s configur en tant que SSID priv r seau sans fil priv Le cas ch ant modifiez les param tres du point d acc s et essayez de nouveau Si votre fournisseur Internet a enregistr l adresse MAC de l appareil utilis pour vous connecter Internet pour la premi re fois et proc de l authentification de l adresse MAC chaque fois que vous vous connectez Internet il se peut que votre t l viseur ne puisse pas se connecter Internet puisque son adresse MAC est diff rente de celle de l appareil ordinateur Le cas ch ant demandez votre fournisseur Internet la proc dure suivre pour connecter
43. OpenSSL Project All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms with or without modification are permitted provided that the following conditions are met 1 Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer 2 Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution 3 All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www openssl org 4 The names OpenSSL Toolkit and OpenSSL Project must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission For written permission please contact openssl core openssl org 5 Products derived from this software may not be called OpenSSL nor may OpenSSL appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project 6 Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit http www opensstl org THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT AS IS AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTI
44. Output 10W x2 Dimensions WxDxH Body 36 5 x 3 1 x 24 0 inch 926 7 x 78 2 x 608 4 mm With stand 36 5 x 10 0 x 26 3 inch 926 7 x 255 0 x 668 2 mm Weight Without Stand 29 5 lbs 13 4 Kg With Stand 38 1 lbs 17 3 Kg Environmental Considerations Operating Temperature 10 C to 40 C 50 F to 104 F Operating Humidity 10 to 80 non condensing Storage Temperature 20 C to 45 C 4 F to 113 F Storage Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Stand Swivel Left Right 20 20 English 67 Model Name LN40B630 Screen Size 40 inches Diagonal 40 0 inches measured diagonally PC Resolution Optimum 1920 x 1080 60 Hz Sound Output 10W x 2 Dimensions WxDxH Body 39 2 x 3 1 x 25 6 inch 995 1 x 78 6 x 650 4 mm With stand 39 2 x 10 0 x 27 8 inch 995 1 x 255 0 x 705 9 mm Weight Without Stand 32 4 lbs 14 7 Kg With Stand 41 2 lbs 18 7 Kg Environmental Considerations Operating Temperature 10 C to 40 C 50 F to 104 F Operating Humidity 10 to 80 non condensing Storage Temperature 20 C to 45 C 4 F to 113 F Storage Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Stand Swivel Left Right 20 20 Model Name LN46B630 Screen Size 46 inches Diagonal 46 0 inches measured diagonally PC Resolution Optimum 1920 x 1080 60 Hz Sound Output 10W x2 Dimensions WxDxH Body 44 0 x 3 1 x 30 7 inch 1118 5 x 78 6 x 779
45. POWER du t l viseur wig ES Le message Select Language of the OSD s affiche 2 Appuyez sur ENTER C Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour s lectionner la langue Plug amp Play suivie de la touche ENTER L Le message Choisir Util domicile pour un Ur x A i i Select Language of the OSD t l viseur la maison s affiche Language English 3 Utilisez la touche lt ou pour choisir D mo magasin ou Util domicile Appuyez ensuite sur ENTERC amp Le message M moriser une source d antenne s affiche Nous vous recommandons de r gler le t l viseur au mode Util domicile afin d obtenir la meilleure image possible votre domicile D mo magasin ne doit tre utilis qu en magasin Si l appareil est r gl par inadvertance au mode D mo magasin et que vous voulez revenir au mode Util domicile Standard appuyez sur la touche de volume du t l viseur Lorsque le r glage du volume est affich l cran appuyez sur la touche MENU du t l viseur pendant cinq secondes C Enter 4 Utilisez la touche A ou Y pour m moriser les canaux de la connexion s lectionn e Appuyez sur ENTER 4 pour lectionner D marrer Air signal d antenne de type air C ble signal d antenne de type c ble Auto signaux d antenne de type air et c ble En mode C ble vous pouvez s lectionner la source de signal appropri e parmi STD HRC et IRC en appuyant sur la touche A Y lt ou
46. Pendant le diaporama ou pendant l affichage d une photo appuyez sur la touche TOOLS pour r gler l option 2 Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour choisir l option voulue puis sur ENTER C won Q Arr ter le diaporama D m Diaporama Vous pouvez lancer ou arr ter un diaporama Q Vitesse du diap Lent Normal Rapide CRT ET Vous pouvez choisir la vitesse du diaporama Cette fonction n est accessible que pendant un diaporama Vous pouvez galement modifier la vitesse du diaporama en appuyant sur la touche lt lt REW ou gt gt FF pendant le diaporama Q Effet diaporama Vous pouvez choisir l effet de transition l cran du diaporama Aucun Fondu1 Fondu2 Masquer Spirale Damier Lin aire Escaliers Volet Al atoire Cette fonction n est accessible que pendant un diaporama Q Rotation Vous pouvez faire pivoter les photos enregistr es sur un dispositif de m moire USB Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur la touche lt 4 l image pivote de 270 180 90 et 0 Chaque fois que vous appuyez sur la touche l image pivote de 90 180 270 et 0 Le fichier pivot n est pas sauvegard Fran ais 44 Q Zoom Vous pouvez agrandir les photos enregistr es sur un dispositif de m moire USB x1 gt x2 x4 Pour d placer la photo agrandie appuyez sur la touche ENTER C4 suivie des touches A lt gt Remarque lorsque l image
47. Pour toute information sur la mani re de configurer et de connecter un routeur reportez vous au mode d emploi du produit correspondant Le t l viseur peut tre connect directement au r seau LAN par l interm diaire d un routeur Si vous utilisez un routeur IP qui prend en charge le protocole DHCP configurez le en mode DHCP ou adresse IP statique Pour conna tre les proc dures d utilisation d une adresse IP statique informez vous aupr s de votre fournisseur d acc s Internet Fran ais 31 Q Connexion au r seau Sans fil Vous pouvez acc der sans fil au r seau par un routeur IP sans fil Panneau lat ral du t l viseur 5 7 Routeur IP i sans fil Port LAN mural ou Adaptateur LAN sans fil j Samsung J I eD C ble LAN 1 Branchez l adaptateur sans fil LAN Samsung la borne USB1 HDD ou USB2 du t l viseur 2 Ss Ses Pour utiliser un r seau sans fil vous avez besoin de l adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung WISO9ABGN L adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung est vendu s par ment Vous pouvez acheter l adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung WISO9ABGN chez un de nos d taillants s lectionn s dans les boutiques en ligne ou sur le site Samsungparts com Pour utiliser un r seau sans fil le t l viseur doit tre connect un routeur IP sans fil Si le routeur IP sans fil n est pas compatible avec le mode DHCP le t l viseur doit utiliser une adresse IP st
48. Sort key Section 4 Press the lt or button to select a sorting standard Basic View Title Artist Mood Genre Folder Preference The Music files are sorted according to the newly selected sorting standard 5 Press the Y button to move to the File List Section Press the gt Play ENTER 4 button to start playing music in the order selected by the user To move to the previous next group press the lt lt REW or gt gt FF button Music information is automatically set The mood information extracted from a music file may differ from the expectations of the user You can change the mood and preference If there is no title information for a music file the filename is displayed If no information is available for the Artist Album Year or Genre the corresponding item is displayed as blank Basic View Shows the folders of the USB memory device If you select a folder and press the ENTER C4 button only the music files contained in the selected folder are displayed When sorted according to the Basic View you cannot set Favorite files Title Sorts the music titles in symbol number alphabet special order and shows the music file Artist Sorts the music file by artist in symbol number alphabet special order Mood Energetic Rhythmical Sad Exciting Calm Unclassified Sorts music files by the mood You can change the music mood information Genre Sorts music files by th
49. THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 17 Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16 If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee il END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms To do so attach the following notices to the program It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found lt one line to give the program s name and a brief idea of what it does gt Copyright C lt year gt lt name of author gt This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it
50. Tonalit noire Off Fonc Plus fonc Le plus fonc Vous pouvez choisir le niveau de noir l cran pour r gler la profondeur de ce dernier D p Cintre D Retour Fran ais 16 Contraste dynam Off Basse Moyen Haute Vous pouvez r gler le constraste de mani re l optimiser Gamma ll est possible de r gler l intensit des couleurs primaires rouge vert bleu Espace couleur L espace couleur est une matrice compos e des couleurs rouge vert et bleu S lectionnez votre espace couleur pr f r pour obtenir des couleurs les plus naturelles possibles e Auto Cet espace couleur s ajuste automatiquement aux nuances naturelles en fonction des sources des programmes e Standard L espace couleur natif offre des tons riches et pleins e Personnel R gle la gamme des couleurs selon votre pr f rence amp Une modification de la valeur des r glages entra ne un rafra chissement de l cran amp Les r glages peuvent tre d finis et m moris s pour chacun des appareils externes branch s une entr e du t l viseur Par exemple si un lecteur DVD est branch la prise HDMI 1 et qu il est actuellement s lectionn les param tres et les r glages seront sauvegard s pour le lecteur Couleur Rouge Vert Bleu Jaune Cyan ou Magenta Couleur est accessible lorsque Espace couleur est r gl Personnel Dans Couleur vous pouvez r gler les valeurs RVB de la couleur choisie Pour r tab
51. Wall TV Rear Panel Sy LAN AUDIO Ye OUT 4 LAN Cable You can connect the LAN via a Sharer Router The LAN Port on the Wall TV Rear Panel IP Sharer w SS EEE Li Ct E E LAN Cable LAN Cable The terminals the position of the port and the type of the external device may differ depending on the manufacturer If you are using a static IP address your ISP will inform you of the IP address subnet mask gateway and DNS You must enter these values to complete the network settings If you do not know the values ask your network administrator For the information on how to configure and connect a Sharer Router refer to the owner s manual for the corresponding product You can connect the TV to the LAN directly without connecting it through a Sharer Router If you use an IP Sharer IP Router that supports DHCP you can set up the device as either DHCP or static IP For the procedures to use a static IP address ask your Internet Service Provider SEs e BB English 31 Q Network Connection Wireless You can connect to the network wirelessly through a wireless IP sharer TV Side Panel Lu n Wireless IP sharer Samsung Wireless LAN The LAN Port on the Wall Adapter u ET LAN Cable 1 Connect the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter into the USB1 HDD or USB2 terminal of the TV 2
52. affichage Votre t l viseur prend en charge les fonctions d affichage multibalayage dans les domaines de fr quence suivant Fr quence horizontale kHz 30 60 Fr quence verticale Hz 60 75 Taux de rafra chissement maximum de l ordinateur 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 L image n est pas centr e sur l cran R glez la position horizontale et verticale La position de l cran doit tre r gl e sur la source de sortie c d STB l aide d un signal num rique L image semble d form e dans un angle de l cran Si la fonction Plein cran est s lectionn e pour certains appareils externes l image peut sembler d form e dans un angle de l cran Ce dommage est caus par les appareils externes et non par le t l viseur Le message R tablit tous les param tres aux r glages pr d finis en usine s affiche Ce message s affiche lorsqu on maintient la touche EXIT enfonc e pendant quelques instants Les param tres sont r tablis aux r glages pr d finis en usine L cran TFT ACL utilise un affichage constitu de pixels secondaires 6 220 800 n cessitant une technologie sophistiqu e Cependant il se peut qu il y ait l cran quelques pixels lumineux ou noirs Ces pixels n ont aucun impact sur les performances de ce produit 1 Fixez votre t l viseur ACL sur le support amp Deux personnes ou plus devraient porter le t l viseur S assurer de bien distinguer le devant
53. connect the cable to the R jack If your VCR is stereo you must connect two cables When connecting to AV IN 1 the color of the AV IN 1 Y VIDEO jack Green does not match the color of the video cable Yellow PC IN PC AUDIO Connects to the video and audio output jacks on your PC B 2 2 If your PC supports an HDMI connection you can connect this to the HDMI IN 1 DVI 2 3 or 4 terminal If your PC supports a DVI connection you can connect this to the HDMI IN 1 DVI DVI AUDIO IN R AUDIO L terminal DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL Connects to a Digital Audio component such as a Home theater receiver When a Digital Audio System is connected to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL jack Decrease the volume of the TV and adjust the volume level with the system s volume control 5 1CH audio is possible when the TV is connected to an external device supporting 5 1CH When the Home Theater receiver is set to On you can hear sound output from the TV s Optical jack When the TV is displaying a DTV air signal the TV will send out 5 1 channel sound to the Home theater receiver When the source is a digital component such as a DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box and is connected to the TV via HDMI only 2 channel sound will be heard from the Home Theater receiver If you want to hear 5 1 channel audio connect the digital audio out jack on DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite
54. containing photo music and or movie files to the USB1 HDD or USB2 jack on the side of the TV Gar 5 3 When the Application selection screen is displayed press the ENTER C button to select Media Play USB MTP Media Transfer Protocol is not supported The file system supports FAT16 FAT32 and NTFS USB Drive Certain types of USB Digital camera and audio devices may not be compatible with this TV Media Play only supports USB Mass Storage Class devices MSC MSC is a Mass Storage Class Bulk Only Transport device Examples of MSC are Thumb drives Flash Card Readers and USB HDD USB HUB are not l e ELE zen S supported Please connect directly to the USB port of your TV If you are using a separate cable connection there may be a USB compatibility problem ea J D e Before connecting your device to the TV please back up your files to prevent Photo Music Movie Setup them from damage or loss of data SAMSUNG is not responsible for any data KT file damage or data loss Connect a USB HDD to the dedicated USB1 HDD port Warning Do not exceed 1 5 amperes Do not disconnect the USB device while it is loading MSC supports MP3 JPEG and movie files while a PTP device supports JPEG files only The higher the resolution of the image the longer it takes to display on the screen The maximum supported JPEG resolution is 15360X8640 pixels For unsupported or corrupted files the
55. covered work in a country would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid If pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement you convey or propagate by procuring conveyance of a covered work and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use propagate modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it A patent license is discriminatory if it does not include within the scope of its coverage prohibits the exercise of or is conditioned on the non exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work and under which the third party grants to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you a discriminatory patent license a in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you or copies made from those copies or b primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work unless you entered into that arrangement or that patent license was granted
56. d autres appareils par exemple le t l viseur Internet Si vous tes incapable de vous connecter Internet apr s avoir suivi toutes les proc dures donn es par votre fournisseur Internet veuillez communiquer avec un centre de service Samsung Electronics au 1 800 SAMSUNG e Choix du r seau Point d acc s Il est possible de s lectionner le routeur IP lorsqu on utilise un r seau sans fil Si un point d acc s sans fil ne se trouve pas dans la liste appuyez sur la touche rouge Lorsque la connexion est tablie le syst me revient automatiquement l cran Si un point d acc s n cessitant une authentification de s curit a t s lectionn La fen tre de saisie de la cl de s curit s affiche Saisissez la cl de s curit et appuyez sur la touche bleue de la t l commande Si le type de chiffrement de s curit est WEP les touches 0 9 A F seront Configuration du r seau sans fil disponibles pendant la saisie de la cl de s curit GLEN _ om Ni Supprimer Effectu Branchement WPS configuration Wi Fi prot g e SARA AS eae e Sila Code de s curit est d j configur e Dans la liste des points d acc s choisissez Configuration du r seau sans fil WPS Selectionnez du r seau Vous pouvez choisir PBC NIP Code de s curit sson jee Recherche APA Ad hoc LU D p C Intro D Retour Branchement l aide de PBC Choisissez un PBC configuration par touches Appuyez sur la tou
57. espace d installation m Stabilisation du t l viseur par rapport au mur ou une armoire m Sp cifications m Dimensions Q Licence SRS Ce TruSurround HD SRS et le symbole c gt sont des marques de commerce de SRS Labs Inc La technologie TruSurround HD est int gr e sous licence de SRS Labs Inc 1 DOLBY DIGITAL Fabriqu sous licence par Dolby Laboratories Dolby et le symbole en forme de double D sont des marques d pos es de Dolby Laboratories Certifi DivX pour la lecture de vid os DivX y compris le contenu payant Q Symboles A 2 Appuyer Remarque A Touche a effleurement TOOLS Frangais 1 CONFIGURATION DE VOTRE T L VISEUR Pour utiliser votre t l viseur vous devez d abord le configurer en fonction de votre environnement Les figures et illustrations de ce guide de l utilisateur ne sont fournies qu titre de r f rence Elles peuvent diff rer du produit r el La conception et les caract ristiques techniques du produit peuvent tre modifi es sans pr avis afin d en am liorer la performance Liste des caract ristiques Param tres d image modifiables pouvant tre stock s dans la m moire du t l viseur Minuterie automatique pour allumer ou teindre le t l viseur Minuterie de mise en veille sp ciale Interface num rique et de r seau exceptionnelle Gr ce au syntoniseur num rique HD int gr l coute d missions HD sans abonne
58. for more natural picture colors R Offset Adjusts the red color darkness G Offset Adjusts the green color darkness B Offset Adjusts the blue color darkness R Gain Adjusts the red color brightness G Gain Adjusts the green color brightness B Gain Adjusts the blue color brightness Reset The previously adjusted white balance will be reset to the factory defaults Flesh Tone You can emphasize the pink flesh tone in the picture Changing the adjustment value will refresh the adjusted screen Edge Enhancement Off On You can emphasize object boundaries in the picture xvYCC Off On Setting the xvYCC mode to on increases detail and color space when watching movies from an external device ie DVD player connected to the HDMI or Component IN jacks xvYCC is available when the picture mode is set to Movie and the external input is set to HDMI or Component mode English 17 Q Picture Options In PC mode you can only make changes to the Color Tone and Size from among the HOIN items in Picture Options Coloritone Normal Size 16 9 Digital NR Auto Color Tone Cool Normal Warm1 Warm2 Warm3 Warm1 Warm2 or Warm3 is only activated when the picture mode is Movie Film Mode Off Blue Only Mode Off Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an Me Standard input of the TV Move C Enter 9 Return Size Occasionally you may want to change the size
59. groupe choisi Ou encore Choisissez une cl de tri Choisissez ensuite les photos du groupe d sir dans la section Liste des fichiers Pour passer au groupe pr c dent ou suivant appuyez sur la touche lt lt REW ou gt gt FF Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS 3 Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour choisir Lire groupe courant puis sur ENTERC Toutes les photos du groupe de classement feront partie du diaporama Fran ais 43 Lecture d un diaporama compos des fichiers choisis seulement 1 Appuyez sur la touche Y pour s lectionner la section Liste des fichiers 2 Appuyez sur la touche lt ou pour choisir la photo d sir e dans la section Liste des fichiers 3 Appuyez sur la touche jaune 4 R p tez la proc dure ci dessus pour choisir plusieurs photos Le symbole v s affiche la gauche de la photo choisie Un diaporama doit contenir plus d un fichier Pour d s lectionner tous les fichiers appuyez sur la touche TOOLS et choisissez D s lect tout 5 Appuyez sur la touche gt Lecture ENTER C4 Les fichiers s lectionn s feront partie du diaporama Ou encore Dans la section Liste des fichiers appuyez sur la touche jaune pour choisir les photos d sir es Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour choisir Diaporama puis sur ENTER C Les fichiers s lectionn s feront partie du diaporama il Options du menu Diaporama 1
60. menu Liste appareils s affiche Permuter vers les appareils s lectionn s peut prendre jusqu 2 minutes Il n est pas possible d annuler l op ration de permutation La dur e n cessaire au balayage d pend du nombre d appareils branch s Lorsque le balayage est termin le nombre d appareils trouv s n est pas affich Bien que le t l viseur recherche automatiquement la liste des appareils quant marche le met sous tension l aide la touche de mise sous tension les appareils qui y sont branch s n apparaissent pas toujours automatiquement dans la liste lors de sa mise sous tension Appuyez sur la touche rouge pour rechercher l appareil branch Si vous avez s lectionn un appareil externe en appuyant sur la touche SOURCE vous ne pouvez pas utiliser la fonction Anynet Permutez vers un appareil Anynet l aide de la fonction Liste appareils SSS B Menu Anynett Le menu Anynett varie selon le type et l tat des appareils Anynett branch s au t l viseur Anynet Description Regarder t l viseur Anynet au mode de diffusion t l viseur Liste appareils Affiche la liste des appareils Anynet Nom de Dispositif MENU Affiche les menus des appareils branch s Par exemple si un enregistreur DVD est branch le menu du disque de celui ci s affiche Nom de Dispositif INFO Affiche les menus de lecture des appareils branch s Par exemple si un enregistreur DVD est branch le
61. menu de lecture du disque de celui ci s affiche Enregistrer enregistreur Lance aussit t l enregistrement sur l enregistreur Disponible seulement pour les appareils avec fonction d enregistrement Arr ter l enregistrement enregistreur Arr te l enregistrement R cepteur Le son provient du r cepteur Si plusieurs enregistreurs sont branch s ceux ci s affichent comme enregistreur Si un seul enregistreur est branch il est repr sent par nom_appareil Frangais 56 Touches de la t l commande du t l viseur accessibles en mode Anynet Type appar tat de fonctionnement Touches accessibles Apr s une permutation vers l appareil lorsque le menu de l appareil correspondant s affiche l cran Touches num riques Appareil Anynet Touche A lt gt ENTERCS Touches de couleur Touche EXIT Apr s la permutation vers l appareil pendant lt lt Recherche vers l arri re gt gt Recherche vers la lecture d un fichier l avant Arr t gt Lecture i Pause Appareil avec Apr s la permutation vers l appareil pendant syntoniseur int gr l coute d une mission t l vis e V CHA Appareil audio Lorsque le r cepteur est activ VOL MUTE La fonction Anynet ne fonctionne que lorsque la source active de la t l commande du t l viseur est r
62. of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate Conveying Non Source Forms You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5 provided that you also convey the machine readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License in one of these ways a Convey the object code in or embodied in a physical product including a physical distribution medium accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange b Convey the object code in or embodied in a physical product including a physical distribution medium accompanied by a written offer valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that product model to give anyone who possesses the object code either 1 a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source or 2 access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge c Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially and only if you received the
63. only to enable use of the work with that Major Component or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form A Major Component in this context means a major essential component kernel window system and so on of the specific operating system if any on which the executable work runs or a compiler used to produce the work or an object code interpreter used to run it The Corresponding Source for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate install and for an executable work run the object code and to modify the work including scripts to control those activities However it does not include the work s System Libraries or general purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodified in performing those activities but which are not part of the work For example Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work Basic Perm
64. played Playing the selected music files 1 Press the Y button to select the File List Section 2 Press the lt or gt button to select the desired music file 3 Press the Yellow button 4 Repeat the above operation to select multiple music files The v appears to the left of the selected music file To deselect all selected files press the TOOLS button and select Deselect All 5 Press the gt Play ENTER C4 button The selected files will be played English 48 ij Music Play option Menu Music Play Option Menu Q Repeat Mode On Off You can play music files repeatedly Q Picture Setting Sound Setting You can configure the picture and sound settings love 4p Adjust Exit Q Information The music file information is displayed Q Safe Remove You can remove the device safely from the TV il Sorting the Movie List You can sort movies in the Movie List by a particular standard 1 Press the MEDIA P button 2 Press the lt or gt button to select Movie then press the ENTER 4 button 3 Press the A button to move to the Sort key Section 4 Press the lt or button to select a sorting standard Basic View Timeline Title Folder Preference The movie files are sorted according to the newly selected sorting standard 5 Press the gt Play ENTER C button to play the movie in the order selected B Favorites Setting wSelect E Tools D Return Movie info
65. s lectionner Oui puis sur ENTER C4 Cette fonction n est accessible qu en mode C ble Q Liste des canaux Pour conna tre les proc dures d taill es relatives l utilisation de Liste des canaux consultez les instructions sous la rubrique Gestion des canaux voir pages 14 15 Vous pouvez s lectionner ces options en appuyant simplement sur la touche CH LIST de la t l commande QO Syn Pr cise canaux analogiques seulement La syntonisation de pr cision permet de r gler manuellement un canal pour en optimiser la r ception Si vous n enregistrez pas les canaux syntonis s avec pr cision dans la m moire les r glages ne sont pas sauvegard s Le symbole s affiche en regard des canaux syntonis s Pour r initialiser les r glages de syntonisation de pr cision appuyez sur la touche W pour s lectionner R gler puis sur ENTER L Fran ais 13 i Gestion des canaux Ce menu permet d ajouter de supprimer ou d finir les canaux favoris et d utiliser le t l horaire pour les diffusions num riques saynofe xneueg w VHS Air Tous les canaux Affiche tous les canaux actuellement accessibles i Air TV 3 Alice s Adventures in Wonderland Canaux ajout s Affiche tous les canaux ajout s Favori Affiche tous les canaux favoris Pour s lectionner les canaux favoris configur s appuyez sur la touche FAV CH de la t l commande Enregistrement par minuterie Affichage de toutes les mis
66. sur la touche A pour passer la section Cl de tri 4 Appuyez sur la touche lt ou pour choisir un crit re de classement Aff de base P date Titre Dossier P pr f Les fichiers film sont class s selon le crit re nouvellement choisi 5 Appuyez sur la touche gt Lecture ENTERC amp pour lancer le film dans l ordre choisi L information relative au film est r gl e automatiquement Il est possible de modifier les pr f rences R gl fav Choisir 4 Outils D Retour Q Aff de base Affiche les dossiers du dispositif de m moire USB Lorsque vous choisissez un dossier et que vous appuyez sur la touche ENTER 4 seuls les fichiers film du dossier choisi sont affich s ll n est pas possible de r gler les fichiers favoris dans le classement Aff de base Q P date Les films sont class s par date Ils sont class es par ann e et par mois a partir du film le plus r cent Q Titre Les films sont class s par titre par ordre de symbole num ro alphab tique sp cial Q Dossier S il y a beaucoup de dossiers dans le dispositif USB les fichiers film sont affich s dans l ordre dans chaque dossier Le fichier film dans le dossier source est affich en premier et les autres le sont ensuite par ordre alphab tique de nom Q P pr f gt gt a eo a amp os Les films sont class s par pr f rence favori Il est possible de modifier les pr d rences de film Modification du r glage
67. sur la touche EXIT pour quitter Vous pouvez enregistrer la source en s lectionnant Enregistrement nom_appareil Appuyez sur la touche Le pour enregistrer l mission que vous tes en train de regarder Si vous regardez une vid o sur un autre appareil la vid o de cet appareil est enregistr e Avant d enregistrer v rifiez si la prise d antenne est correctement branch e l appareil enregistreur Pour brancher correctement une antenne un appareil d enregistrement consultez le guide d utilisation de l appareil fl coute par l interm diaire d un r cepteur cha ne de cin ma maison ll est possible d couter le son par l interm diaire d un r cepteur plut t que par les haut parleurs du t l viseur 1 Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS Appuyez sur la touche ENTER C pour s lectionner la fonction Anynett HDMI CEC 2 Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour s lectionner R cepteur Appuyez sur la touche lt ou pour choisir Marche ou Arr t 3 Appuyez sur la touche EXIT pour quitter Si votre r cepteur prend seulement le son en charge il pourrait ne pas figurer dans la liste des appareils Le r cepteur fonctionne lorsque la prise d entr e optique est reli e la prise de sortie optique DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL du t l viseur Lorsque le r cepteur cha ne de cin ma maison est r gl Marche il est possible d entendre du son provenant de la prise optique du t l viseur Lorsque le t l vi
68. t l vision ANTIN Branchement d une bo te de jonction servant d crypter certaines canal Si votre bo te de jonction ne d crypte que certaines canal comme les canal dites premium suivez les instructions ci dessous Pour ce faire vous avez besoin d un s parateur bidirectionnel d un interrupteur RF A B et de quatre longueurs de C ble coaxial Ces articles sont disponibles dans la plupart des magasins d lectronique ANTIN HUE ni MECS C ble d arriv e EH IHE il N cae o n Arri re du t l viseur PTR Interrupteur RF A B C blos lecteur PA Pp SN Localisez et d branchez le C ble branch la prise ANT IN de votre bo te de jonction Cette prise peut s appeler ANT IN VHF IN ou simplement IN Branchez ce Cable a un s parateur bidirectionnel Branchez un Cable de RF entre une des prises OUTPUT du s parateur et la prise IN de la boite de jonction Branchez un Cable de RF entre la prise ANT OUT de la bo te de jonction et la prise B IN de l interrupteur RF A B Branchez un autre Cable entre l autre prise OUT du s parateur et la prise A IN de l interrupteur RF A B Connectez le dernier Cable RF entre la borne OUT du commutateur RF A B et la borne ANT IN situ e l arri re du t l viseur Apr s avoir tabli cette connexion r glez l interrupteur A B en position A pour regarder les c
69. that you received You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps 1 assert copyright on the software and 2 offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify it For the developers and authors protection the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software For both users and authors sake the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them although the manufacturer can do so This is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users freedom to change the software The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use which is precisely where it is most unacceptable Therefore we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products If such problems arise substantially in other domains we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL as needed to protect the freedom of users Finally every program is threatened constantly by software patents States should not allow patents to restrict development and use
70. the TV off while watching in PIP mode and turn it on again the PIP window will disappear You may notice that the picture in the PIP window becomes slightly unnatural when you use the main screen to view a game or karaoke SS Q PIP On Off You can activate or deactivate the PIP function Size gt BE oo Size You can select a size of the PIP picture Position Air Cable Position gt LJ L7 FI L Channel You can select a position of the PIP picture amp In Double mmj mode Position cannot be selected Air Cable Air Cable Select either Air or Cable as the input source for the sub screen Move Enter 9 Return Channel You can select the channel for the sub screen English 20 Using Your TV as a Computer PC Display Setting Up Your PC Software Based on Windows XP The Windows display settings for a typical computer are shown below The actual screens on Display Properties your PC will probably be different depending upon your particular version of Windows and hones Deal Seven Sere Aomenne Se Drag the monitor icons to match the physical arrangement of your monitors your particular video card However even if your actual screens look different the same basic set up information will apply in almost all cases If not contact your computer manufacturer or Samsung Dealer 1 First click on Control
71. the diagram to the right see Antennas with 75 Q Round Leads If you have two antennas see Separate VHF and UHF Antennas lil Antennas with 300 Q Flat Twin Leads If you are using an off air antenna such as a roof antenna or rabbit ears that has 3000 twin 4 flat leads follow the directions below 1 Place the wires from the twin leads under the screws on a 300 75 Q adapter not supplied Use a screwdriver to tighten the screws 2 Plug the adaptor into the ANT IN terminal on the back of the TV Antennas with 75 Q Round Leads Plug the antenna lead into the ANT IN terminal on the back of the TV Separate VHF and UHF Antennas If you have two separate antennas for your TV one VHF and one UHF you must combine IA the two antenna signals before connecting the antennas to the TV This procedure requires an optional combiner adaptor available at most electronics shops lt BiP k a OvwF J 1 Connect both antenna leads to the combiner 2 Plug the combiner into the ANT IN terminal on the bottom of the rear panel English 8 Connecting Cable TV To connect to a cable TV system follow the instructions below ANTIN Cable without a Cable Box Plug the incoming cable into the ANT IN terminal on the back of the TV Because this TV is cable ready you do not need a cable box to view unscrambled cable channels Conn
72. the original screen size the location change function doesn t work The enlarged file is not saved Q Background Music You can select background music when watching a Slide Show To use this feature there must be music and photo files stored on the USB device Loading music files is needed to change BGM mode Play music files in music category to load Background Music Off On e Off Background music is not played e On When the background music is available if you select On the music is played back BGM Mode Mood Selected File Shuffle You can select a mode to use for the background music BGM Mood Energetic Rhythmical Sad Exciting Calm Unclassified Music with the mood you selected is set as the background music If you set BGM Mode to Mood you can select a mood Select Music File 0 File s Selected Only the selected music file is set as the background music If you set BGM Mode to Selected File you can select a music file Q Picture Setting Sound Setting You can select the picture and sound settings Q Information The photo file information is displayed Q Safe Remove You can remove the device safely from the TV English 45 Sorting the Music List Q You can sort music files in the Music List by a particular standard 1 Press the MEDIA P button 2 Press the lt or gt button to select Music then press the ENTER C button 3 Press the A button to move to the
73. you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program Use with the GNU Affero General Public License Notwithstanding any other provision of this License you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work and to convey the resulting work The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License section 13 concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such Revised Versions of this License The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and or new versions of the GNU General Public License from time to time Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns Each version is given a distinguishing version number If the Program specifies that a certain numbered version of the GNU General Public License or any later version applies to it you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that numbered version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program does not specify a version number of t
74. 0 90 120 Minuterie 1 150 ou 180 min Mise en marche e 2 s E 00 al D sactiver A Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils Il est galement possible de roma 5 za r gler la mise en veille en choisissant Outils Mise en veille w w D sactiver Pour d sactiver la fonction Mise en veille s lectionnez Off TE Q Minuterie 1 Minuterie 2 Minuterie 3 m Trois r glages de minuterie mise en marche arr t peuvent tre effectu s II faut d abord r gler 4 D pl R glage CH Intro D Retour I horloge Mise en marche S lectionnez l heure les minutes am pm et activer d sactiver Pour activer la minuterie avec le r glage choisi r glez Activer Arr t S lectionnez l heure les minutes am pm et activer d sactiver Pour activer la minuterie avec le r glage choisi r glez Activer Volume S lectionner le niveau sonore d sir Source TV USB Vous pouvez choisir le contenu de la m moire du t l viseur ou d un dispositif USB lire au moment de la mise sous tension automatique du t l viseur Choisissez TV ou USB Veillez ce qu un dispositif USB soit branch au t l viseur amp Il est impossible de cr er un diaporama s il n y a qu un seul fichier photo dans le dispositif USB Antenne lorsque la fonction Source est r gl e sur TV Choisissez Air ou C ble Cha ne lorsque la fonction Source est r gl e sur TV S lectionne le canal d sir Contenu lorsque la fon
75. 00 726 7864 In Canada 1 800 SAMSUNG Q Precautions When Displaying a Still Image A still image may cause permanent damage to the TV screen e Do not display a still image on the LCD panel for more than 2 hours as it can cause screen image retention This image retention is also known as screen burn To avoid such image retention reduce the degree of brightness and contrast of the screen when displaying a still image Watching the LCD TV in 4 3 format for a long period of time may leave traces of borders displayed on the left right and center of the screen caused by the difference of light emission on the screen Playing a DVD or a game console may cause a similar effect to the screen Damages caused by the above effect are not covered by the Warranty e Displaying still images from Video games and PC for longer than a certain period of time may produce partial after images To prevent this effect reduce the brightness and contrast when displaying still images 2009 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd All rights reserved CONTENTS m List of Features m Accessories m Viewing the Control Panel m Viewing the Remote Control m Installing Batteries in the Remote Control m Viewing the menus M Plug amp Play Feature ieee aeree eere EE EEE EEE EEE ET Connections m Connecting VHF and UHF Antenna m Connecting Cable TV m Viewing the Connection Panel CHANNEL m Channel Menu m Managing Channel PICTURE
76. 080 avi AVI H 264 BP MP HP LPCM 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP ASP ADPCM 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 Divx 3 11 4 x 5 1 6 0 720x576 XviD MP3 1920x1080 mkv MKV H 264 BP MP HP Leeni 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP ASP ADPCM 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 Divx 3 11 4 x 5 1 6 0 720x576 XviD Ma 1920x1080 ast ASF H 264 BP MP HP LPCM 1920x1080 ADPCM MPEG4 SP ASP TA 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 wmv ASF vC1 WMA 1920x1080 H 264 BP MP HP de 1920x1080 mp4 MP4 MPEG4 SP ASP ADPCM 1920x1080 SMP4 ree XVID 1920x1080 H 264 BP MP HP ADPCM 1920x1080 3 3GPP oP MPEG4 SP ASP AAC 1920x1080 MPEG2 AC3 1920x1080 vro won MPEG MPEG1 LPCM 1920x1080 die MPEG1 AC3 1920x1080 MP9 PS MPEG mpeg MPEG2 PCM 1920x1080 MPEG2 1920x1080 ts aie tp TS H 264 Mes 1920x1080 trp vet 1920x1080 Frangais 51 Touches de commande de lecture vid o Touche Fonctions ENTERCS Lecture pause du fichier film gt Lecture du fichier film 1 Pause du fichier film TOOLS Ex cuter diverses fonctions du menu Film E Quitter le mode de lecture et revenir la liste des films lt gt Avance ou recule dans le fichier film A Y Se d placer au d but ou la fin du fichier le fichier vitesse double Selon le fichier film cette fonction pourrait ne pas tre prise en charge Lecture du groupe de films 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur la touche A pour passer la section Cl d
77. 1 Ib 17 3 Kg Facteurs environnementaux Temp rature de fonctionnement Niveau d humidit durant le fonctionnement Temp rature pour l entreposage Niveau d humidit pour l entreposage 50 F 104 F 10 C 40 C 10 80 sans condensation 4 F 113 F 20 C 45 C 5 95 sans condensation Support pivotant Gauche Droite 20 20 Frangais 67 Mod le LN40B630 Taille de l cran 40 pouces diagonale 40 0 pouces en diagonale R solution PC Optimale 1920 x 1080 60 Hz Son Sortie 10W x 2 Dimensions L x P x H Sans support Avec support 39 2 x 3 1 x 25 6 po 995 1 x 78 6 x 650 4 mm 39 2 x 10 0 x 27 8 po 995 1 x 255 0 x 705 9 mm Poids Sans support Avec support 32 4 Ib 14 7 Kg 41 2 b 18 7 Kg Facteurs environnementaux Temp rature de fonctionnement Niveau d humidit durant le fonctionnement Temp rature pour l entreposage Niveau d humidit pour l entreposage 50 F 104 F 10 C 40 C 10 80 sans condensation 4 F 113 F 20 C 45 C 5 95 sans condensation Support pivotant Gauche Droite 20 20 Mod le LN46B630 Taille de l cran 46 pouces diagonale 46 0 pouces en diagonale R solution PC Optimale 1920 x 1080 60 Hz Son Sortie 10W x 2 Dimensions L x P x H Sans support Avec support 44 0 x 3 1 x 30 7 po 1118 5 x 78 6 x 779 6 mm 44 0 x
78. 10 9 x 28 5 po 1118 5 x 277 0 x 724 5 mm Poids Sans support Avec support 43 0 lb 19 5 Kg 54 0 Ib 24 5 Kg Facteurs environnementaux Temp rature de fonctionnement Niveau d humidit durant le fonctionnement Temp rature pour l entreposage Niveau d humidit pour l entreposage Support pivotant Gauche Droite 50 F 104 F 10 C 40 C 10 80 sans condensation 4 F 113 F 20 C 45 C 5 95 sans condensation 20 20 Frangais 68 Mod le LN52B630 Taille de l cran 52 pouces diagonale 52 0 pouces en diagonale R solution PC Optimale 1920 x 1080 60 Hz Son Sortie 10W x 2 Dimensions L x P x H Sans support Avec support 49 7 x 3 1 x 32 3 po 1261 5 x 79 9 x 819 3 mm 49 7 x 12 0 x 34 5 po 1261 5 x 305 0 x 877 2 mm Poids Sans support Avec support 56 4 Ib 25 6 Kg 68 3 Ib 31 Kg Facteurs environnementaux Temp rature de fonctionnement Niveau d humidit durant le fonctionnement Temp rature pour l entreposage Niveau d humidit pour l entreposage 50 F 104 F 10 C 40 C 10 80 sans condensation 4 F 113 F 20 C 45 C 5 95 sans condensation Support pivotant Gauche Droite 20 20 Mod le LN40B640 Taille de l cran 40 pouces diagonale 40 0 pouces en diagonale R solution PC Optimale 1920 x 1080 60 Hz Son Sortie 10W x 2 Dimen
79. 26 74 551 57 284 l 1152 x 870 68 681 75 062 100 000 l 720 x 576 35 910 59 950 32 750 1152 x 864 53 783 59 959 81 750 VESA CVT 1280 x 720 44 772 59 855 74 500 1280 x 720 56 456 74 777 95 750 l 1280 x 960 75 231 74 857 130 000 l 640 x 480 31 469 59 940 25 175 l 640 x 480 37 861 72 809 31 500 l 640 x 480 37 500 75 000 31 500 l 800 x 600 37 879 60 317 40 000 800 x 600 48 077 72 188 50 000 800 x 600 46 875 75 000 49 500 1024 x 768 48 363 60 004 65 000 l 1024 x 768 56 476 70 069 75 000 l 1024 x 768 60 023 75 029 78 750 VESA DMT 1152 x 864 67 500 75 000 108 000 1280 x 1024 63 981 60 020 108 000 1280 x 1024 79 976 75 025 135 000 1280 x 800 49 702 59 810 83 500 1280 x 800 62 795 74 934 106 500 l 1280 x 960 60 000 60 000 108 000 1360 x 768 47 712 60 015 85 500 1440 x 900 55 935 59 887 106 500 1440 x 900 70 635 74 984 136 750 1680 x 1050 65 290 59 954 146 250 l 1280 x 720 52 500 70 000 89 040 l VESAGTF 4280 x 1024 74 620 70 000 128 943 Fe VESA DMT DTV CEA 1920 x 1080p 67 500 60 000 148 500 English 21 E Setting up the TV with your PC Preset Press the SOURCE button to select PC mode Q Auto Adjustment Use the Auto Adjust function to have the TV automatically adjust the video signals it receives The function also automatically fine tunes the settings and adjusts the frequency values and positions A Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools me
80. 30 60 90 120 150 and 180 Timer 1 minutes On Time A Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu You can also set the sleep timer by selecting Tools Sleep Timer w 00 am Inactivate H Volume Source Antenna Channel To cancel the Sleep Timer function select Off 7 2 A 5 Q Timer 1 Timer 2 Timer 3 nes Three different on off timer settings can be made 4 gt Move Adjust C Enter 9 Return You must set the clock first On Time Set the hour minute am pm and activate inactivate To activate the timer with the setting you ve chosen set to Activate Off Time Set the hour minute am pm and activate inactivate To activate the timer with the setting you ve chosen set to Activate Volume Set the desired volume level Source TV USB You can select the TV or USB device content to be played when the TV turns on automatically Select TV or USB Make sure that an USB device is connected to your TV When there is only one photo file in the USB the Slide Show will not play Antenna when Source is set to TV Select Air or Cable Channel when Source is set to TV Select the desired channel Contents when Source is set to USB You can select a folder on the USB Device with music or photo files to be played when the TV turns on automatically If the folder name is too long the folder can not be selected Ifyou are using two of the same type USB device be sure the folder names are differe
81. 4 7 pouces en diagonale R solution PC Optimale 1920 x 1080 60 Hz Son Sortie 15W x 2 Dimensions L x P x H Sans support Avec support 53 7 x 3 3 x 32 4 po 1362 9 x 83 0 x 824 2 mm 53 7 x 12 1 x 34 8 po 1362 9 x 308 0 x 884 4 mm Poids Sans support Avec support 65 2 Ib 29 6 Kg 76 1 Ib 34 5 Kg Facteurs environnementaux Temp rature de fonctionnement Niveau d humidit durant le fonctionnement Temp rature pour l entreposage Niveau d humidit pour l entreposage Support pivotant Gauche Droite 50 F 104 F 10 C 40 C 10 80 sans condensation 4 F 113 F 20 C 45 C 5 95 sans condensation 20 20 Le design et les sp cifications peuvent changer sans pr avis Cet appareil est un appareil num rique de cat gorie B Pour les caract ristiques d alimentation et de consommation lectrique voir l tiquette fix e au produit Frangais 70 a Dimensions LN32B650 VUE DE DESSUS ED s i LAN OF DETAILS DU PANNEAU DE PRISES 3 0 I 31 6 ko i 17 6 VUE AVANT VUE LATERALE 7 9 200 mm 7 9 200 mm all VUE ARRIERE REMARQUE Tous les dessins ne sont pas n cessairement des repr sentations l chelle Certaines dimensions peuvent avoir t chang es sans avis Mesurez les dimensions
82. 49 7 k i f 21 7 j ao FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW 15 7 400 mm 15 7 400 mm REAR VIEW NOTE All drawings are not necessarily to scale Some dimensions are subject to change without prior notice Refer to the dimensions prior to performing installation of your TV Not responsible for typographical or printed errors 2009 Samsung Electronics America Inc English 75 LN40B640 L TOP VIEW vh oco 000008 34 40 9 i q i 34 9 I 25 1 19 27 4 20 5 M 10 0 7 FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW 15 7 400 mm P 15 7 400 mm REAR VIEW NOTE All drawings are not necessarily to scale Some dimensions are subject to change without prior notice Refer to the dimensions prior to performing installation of your TV Not responsible for typographical or printed errors 2009 Samsung Electronics America Inc English 76 LN46B640 L TOP VIEW oh oco 000008 JACK PANEL DETAIL 5 2 H X 6 6 W 46 1 40 1 217 FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW 15 7 400 mm Pi 15 7 400 mm REAR VIEW NOTE All drawings are not necessarily to scale Some dimensions are subject to change without prior notice Refer to the dimensions prior to performing installation
83. Ca Enter 9 Retum English 16 Dynamic Contrast Off Low Medium High You can adjust the screen contrast so that the optimal contrast is provided Gamma You can adjust the primary color red green blue intensity Color Space Color space is a color matrix composed of red green and blue colors Select your favorite color space to experience the most natural color e Auto Auto color space automatically adjusts to the most natural color tone based on program sources e Native Native color space offers deep and rich color tone e Custom Adjusts the color range to suit your preference Changing the adjustment value will refresh the adjusted screen Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV For example if you have a DVD player connected to HDMI 1 and it is currently selected settings and adjustments will be saved for the DVD player Color Red Green Blue Yellow Cyan or Magenta Color is available when Color Space is set to Custom In Color you can adjust the RGB values for the selected color To reset the adjusted RGB value select Reset Red Adjusts the red saturation level of the selected color Green Adjusts the green saturation level of the selected color Blue Adjusts the blue saturation level of the selected color Reset Resets the color space to the default values White Balance You can adjust the color temperature
84. Convey the object code using peer to peer transmission provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d A separable portion of the object code whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library need not be included in conveying the object code work A User Product is either 1 a consumer product which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal family or household purposes or 2 anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling In determining whether a product is a consumer product doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage For a particular product received by a particular user normally used refers to a typical or common use of that class of product regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses or expects or is expected to use the product A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial industrial or non consumer uses unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product Installation Information for a User Product means any methods procedures authorization keys or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its
85. Cord Cleaning Cloth amp Batteries AAA x 2 3903 000144 BN63 01798B 2 M4xL16 Holder Wire Cable TV Holder amp Screw X1 Korny an BN61 05596A BN96 10788A y Depending on the model Depending on the model D M4xL16 Stand Screw X4 6002 001294 Cover Bottom LN37B650 LN40B630 LN46B630 LN52B630 LN32B650 BN63 05284A LN37B650 BN63 05285A LN40B640 LN46B640 LN40B630 BN63 05286A LN46B630 BN63 05287A LN52B630 BN63 05478A Stand Screw X8 6002 001294 LN40B640 BN63 05385A LN46B640 BN63 05254A LN32B650 LN55B640 BN63 05452A Please make sure the following items are included with your LCD TV If any items are missing contact your dealer 4 The items color and shape may vary depending on the model English 2 il Viewing the Control Panel The product color and shape may vary depending on the model The front panel buttons can be activated by touching them with your finger LN32B650 LN37B650 VOL CHA SOURCE Ca MENU LN40B630 LN46B630 LN52B630 LN40B640 LN46B640 LN55B640 SOURCE G 0 2 a 6 0 7 0 POWER Press to turn the TV on and off POWER INDICATOR Blinks and turns off when the power is on and lights up in stand by mode V CH A Press to change channels In the on screen menu use the VW CH A buttons as you would use the Y and A buttons on the rem
86. E THE PROPERTY OF THE ORIGINATOR OF THE CONTENT CONTENT OWNER AND OR ITS AFFILIATES OR LICENSORS AND ARE PROTECTED BY COPYRIGHT TRADEMARK AND OTHER INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY LAWS ALL INFOLINK CONTENT IS PROVIDED SOLELY FOR YOUR PERSONAL NONCOMMERCIAL USE YOU MAY NOT USE ANY INFOLINK CONTENT INA MANNER THAT CONSTITUTES AN INFRINGEMENT OF THE CONTENT OWNERS RIGHTS OR THAT HAS NOT BEEN AUTHORIZED BY THE CONTENT OWNER MORE SPECIFICALLY UNLESS EXPLICITLY AUTHORIZED IN THIS DISCLAIMER OR BY THE CONTENT OWNER YOU MAY NOT MODIFY COPY REPRODUCE REPUBLISH UPLOAD POST TRANSMIT TRANSLATE SELL CREATE DERIVATIVE WORKS EXPLOIT OR DISTRIBUTE IN ANY MANNER OR MEDIUM INCLUDING BY EMAIL OR OTHER ELECTRONIC MEANS ANY INFOLINK CONTENT OR ANY OTHER MATERIAL FROM THE INFOLINK SERVICE CONTENT PROVIDED CONTENT OWNERS IN CONNECTION WITH THE INFOLINK SERVICE MAY BE TIME DELAYED AS SPECIFIED BY THE CONTENT OWNER AND OR ITS AFFILIATES INFOLINK IS PROVIDED THROUGH AGREEMENT BETWEEN SAMSUNG AND THE CONTENT OWNER INFOLINK MAY BE TERMINATED OR INTERUPTED AT ANY TIME BY EITHER SAMSUNG OR THE CONTENT PROVIDER OR THROUGH TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT BETWEEN THEM UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE SHALL SAMSUNG OR THE CONTENT PROVIDER BE HELD LIABLE WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ATTORNEY FEES EXPENSES OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES WHATSOEVER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH SUCH TER
87. ES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL EXEMPLARY OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES LOSS OF USE DATA OR PROFITS OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY WHETHER IN CONTRACT STRICT LIABILITY OR TORT INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com This product includes software written by Tim Hudson tjh cryptsoft com Original SSLeay License Copyright C 1995 1998 Eric Young eay cryptsoft com All rights reserved This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young eay cryptsoft com The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the following conditions are aheared to The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution be it the RC4 RSA lhash DES etc code not just the SSL code The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson th cryptsoft com Copyright remains
88. Fran ais 75 LN40B640 VUE DE DESSUS S oS t lems am ccce 44 40 9 k 34 9 p 25 1 13 6 27 4 20 5 r 10 0 7 VUE AVANT VUE LATERALE 15 7 400 mm s 15 7 400 mm VUE ARRI RE REMARQUE Tous les dessins ne sont pas n cessairement des repr sentations l chelle Certaines dimensions peuvent avoir t chang es sans avis Mesurez les dimensions avant d installer votre t l viseur Nous n assumons aucune responsabilit pour les erreurs typographiques ou d impression 2009 Samsung Electronics America Inc Fran ais 76 LN46B640 VUE DE DESSUS D TAILS DU PANNEAU DE PRISES 3 1 A 46 1 R 4 40 1 Li 28 0 28 30 4 AT T 10 9 7 VUE AVANT VUE LAT RALE 15 7 400 mm S 15 7 400 mm VUE ARRI RE REMARQUE Tous les dessins ne sont pas n cessairement des repr sentations l chelle Certaines dimensions peuvent avoir t chang es sans avis Mesurez les dimensions avant d installer votre t l viseur Nous n assumons aucune responsabilit pour les erreurs typographiques ou d impression 2009 Samsung Electronics America Inc Fran ais 77 LN55B640 VUE DE DESSUS D TAILS DU PANNEAU DE PRISES
89. Internet network your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet In this case you have to enter your ID or password when connecting to the Internet using an Internet Sharer Router The internet connection may fail due to a firewall problem In this case contact your Internet service provider If you cannot connect to the Internet even if you have followed the procedures of your Internet service provider please contact Samsung Electronics at 1 800 SAMSUNG Cable Network Setup Auto Setup If you connect the LAN cable and it supports DHCP the Internet Protocol IP Settings are Cable Network Setup automatically configured Internet Protocol Setup Auto Setup 1 Set Network Type to Cable ee 2 Select Cable Network Setup 3 Set Internet Protocol Setup to Auto Setup The Internet Protocol is set automatically 4 Select Network Test to check the network connectivity SOURCE Cable Network Setup Manual To connect the TV to the LAN using a static IP address you must set up the Internet Protocol Cable Network Setup I P Internet Protocol Setup Manual Setup 1 Set Network Type to Cable 2 Select Cable Network Setup Subnet Mask 3 Set Internet Protocol Setup to Manual Setup sey 4 Setup IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway and DNS Server Press the number buttons on the remote control when you set the Network manually age abel nes 5 Select Network Test to check the network connectivity Network Test IP Address Wireless Ne
90. LY NO WARRANTY for details type show w This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions type show c for details The hypothetical commands show w and show c should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License Of course your program s commands might be different for a GUI interface you would use an about box You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the program if necessary For more information on this and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL see lt http www gnu org licenses gt The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License But first please read lt http www gnu org philosophy why not Igpl html gt al LICENSE ISSUES The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license i e both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit See below for the actual license texts Actually both licenses are BSD style Open Source licenses In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl core openssl org OpenSSL License Copyright c 1998 2007 The
91. MINATION OR INTERUPTION SINCE CONTENT TRANSMITTED VIA INFOLINK IS RECEIVED BY MEANS OF NETWORKS AND TRANSMISSION FACILITIES OVER WHICH SAMSUNG HAS NO CONTROL SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY OR LIABILITY FOR ANY INTERRUPTION OR SUSPENSION OF INTERLINK SERVICE OR FOR THE ABSENCE OF CONTENT RESULTING THEREFROM INFORMATION IN THE INFOLINK IS PROVIDED AS IS AND CONSEQUENTLY SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT THE INFORMATION SO PROVIDED EITHER EXPRESSLY OR IMPLIEDLY FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SAMSUNG DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY VALIDITY TIMELINESS LEGALITY OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY INFORMATION OR DATA MADE AVAILABLE THROUGH INFOLINK FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE SHALL SAMSUNG BE HELD LIABLE WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT INCIDENTAL SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ATTORNEY FEES EXPENSES OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES WHATSOEVER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN OR AS A RESULT OF THE USE OF INFOLINK BY YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES English 61 RECOMMENDATIONS a Troubleshooting If the TV seems to have a problem first try this list of possible problems and solutions If none of these troubleshooting tips apply call Samsu
92. NIQUE il Menu Input Q Liste source Permet de s lectionner le t l viseur ou d autres sources d entr e externes comme les lecteurs DVD Blu ray les cablos lecteur ou les r cepteurs satellite bo tier d codeur connect s au t l viseur Permet de s lectionner la source d entr e de votre choix Appuyez sur la touche SOURCE de la t l commande pour afficher une source de signal externe TV AV1 AV2 Composant1 Composant2 PC HDMI1 DVI HDMI2 HDMI3 HDMI4 USB Vous pouvez s lectionner uniquement les appareils externes d j branch s au t l viseur Liste source Dans l option Liste source les entr es branch es sont en surbrillance et figurent en haut de la liste Les entr es non branch es figurent au bas de la liste Si des dispositifs USB sont branch s aux prises USB1 HDD et USB2 ils apparaissent dans la liste sous la forme de USB1 et USB2 dans l ordre L ordinateur demeure toujours sous tension Utilisation des touches de couleur de la t l commande avec l option Liste source Rouge Rafra chir permet de rafra chir les appareils externes branch s Appuyez Rafraichir 4 Outils sur cette touche si la source est branch e et activ e mais n appara t pas dans la liste TOOLS Outils affiche les menus Entrer le nom et Informaci n Ak Liste source Entrer le nom S SS Q Entrer le nom Magn toscope DVD Cable STB Satellite STB PVR STB R cepteur A V Jeu
93. OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES Interpretation of Sections 15 and 16 If the disclaimer of warranty and limitation of liability provided above cannot be given local legal effect according to their terms reviewing courts shall apply local law that most closely approximates an absolute waiver of all civil liability in connection with the Program unless a warranty or assumption of liability accompanies a copy of the Program in return for a fee END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program and you want i
94. Panel on the Windows start menu 2 When the control panel window appears click on Appearance and Themes and a display ers sas dialog box will appear Less g More ia zou Display 1 0000X 1920 by1080 pixels 3 When the control panel window appears click on Display and a display dialogbox will Use dee ot a appear 4 Navigate to the Settings tab on the display dialog box aol e The correct size setting resolution Optimum 1920 X 1080 pixels e If a vertical frequency option exists on your display settings dialog box the correct value is 60 or 60 Hz Otherwise just click OK and exit the dialog box Display Modes If the signal from the system equals the standard signal mode the screen is adjusted automatically If the signal from the system doesn t equal the standard signal mode adjust the mode by referring to your videocard user guide otherwise there may be no video For the display modes listed below the screen image has been optimized during manufacturing D Sub and HDMI DVI Input When using an HDMI DVI cable connection you must use the HDMI IN 1 DVI jack Horizontal Frequency Vertical Frequency Pixel Clock Frequency Sync Polarity Mode Resolution KHz Hz MHz H V IBM 640 x 350 31 469 70 086 25 175 720 x 400 31 469 70 087 28 322 l 640 x 480 35 000 66 667 30 240 l MAC 832 x 624 49 7
95. Pm puis sur la touche ENTER C amp Dans le cas d un signal de c ble num rique s lectionnez la source de signal pour une diffusion analogique et num rique Communiquez avec votre c blodistributeur local pour d teminer le type de syst me de c ble de votre r gion n D 5 Appuyez sur ENTERCS pour s lectionner l option D marrer La m morisation des canaux disponibles commence Pour arr ter la recherche avant la fin Appuyez sur ENTER C lorsque l option Arr t est s lectionn e Une fois tous les canaux m moris s le t l viseur commence liminer les canaux brouill s Puis le menu Auto program s affiche de nouveau Appuyez sur ENTER C amp lorsque la m morisation des canaux est termin e Le message R gler le mode horloge s affiche 6 Appuyez sur ENTERCS Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour s lectionner Auto puis sur la touche ENTER C Le message R gler l heure avanc e s affiche Si vous choisissez Manuel le message R gler la date et l heure du jour s affiche Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour s lectionner Off On ou Auto puis sur la touche ENTER C Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour mettre en surbrillance votre fuseau horaire Appuyez sur ENTER C Si vous recevez un signal num rique l horloge se r gle automatiquement Dans le cas contraire reportez vous la rubrique R glage de l horloge pour savoir comment r gler l horloge voir page 28 9 La description de la m thode de brancheme
96. R Arr t MUTE 8 gt 2 4 POWER Marche Fran ais 25 Blocage V Chip Off On Vous pouvez bloquer des missions selon un syst me de classification Cont paren TV Vous pouvez bloquez des missions selon leur classification Cette fonction permet de Cont paren TV contr ler ce que vos enfants regardent 2 ALL FV VS TV Y Jeunes enfants TV Y7 Enfants de plus de 7 ans TV G Tout public TV PG Pem tout Surveillance parentale TV 14 T l spectateurs de plus de 14 ans TV MA Public averti A Bloq tout ALL Blocage de toutes les classifications FV Fantastique et violence V Violence S Sc nes de sexe L Langage adulte D Dialogue sexuellement explicite La fonction V Chip bloque automatiquement certaines cat gories plus restrictives Par exemple si vous bloquez la cat gorie TV Y la cat gorie TV Y7 sera automatiquement bloqu e De la m me fa on si vous bloquez la cat gorie TV G toutes les cat gories du groupe des jeunes adultes seront alors bloqu es TV G TV PG TV 14 et TV MA Les sous classifications D L S et V sont regroup es de la m me fa on La fonction V Chip bloque automatiquement certaines cat gories qui sont plus restrictives Par exemple si vous bloquez la sous cat gorie L de la cat gorie TV PG les sous cat gories L de TV 14 et de TV MA sont bloqu es automatiquement D pl C Intro 5 Retour Classif MPAA Vous pouvez bloque
97. R 4 button Press the A or Y button to select Auto then Press the ENTER C amp button The message Set to daylight saving time is displayed If you select Manual Set current date and time is displayed Press the A or Y button to select Off On or Auto then press the ENTERL button Press the A or Y button to highlight the time zone for your local area Press the ENTER C amp button If you have received a digital signal the time will be set automatically If not refer to the Setting the Time instructions to set the clock see page 28 9 The description for the connection method providing the best HD screen quality is displayed Check the description and press the ENTER CS button 10 The message Enjoy your TV is displayed When you have finished press the ENTER C button Select Language of the OSD Language English C Enter If you want to reset this feature 1 Press the MENU button to display the menu Press the A or Y button to select Setup then press the ENTER C button I Plug Play 2 Press the ENTER button again to select Plug amp Play eka a The Plug amp Play feature is only available in the TV mode Network Setup V Chip English 7 CONNECTIONS al Connecting VHF and UHF Antennas If your antenna has a set of leads that look like the diagram to the right see Antennas with 300 Q Flat Twin Leads below ue If your antenna has one lead that looks like
98. TOOLS Ex cuter diverses fonctions des menus Photo Music et Movie 0 Arr ter le diaporama la musique ou le film en cours aq p gt Passer au groupe de classement pr c dent ou suivant INFO Afficher l information sur le fichier MEDIA P Quitter le mode Media Play V CH A EXIT TV Arr ter le mode Media Play et revenir au mode t l viseur il Fonction Media Play Cette fonction permet de visualiser des photographies et de lire des fichiers musicaux ou des films enregistr s sur un dispositif USB a m moire de grande capacit MSC Entr e dans le menu Media Play USB 1 Appuyez sur la touche MENU Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour s lectionner Application puis sur ENTER C 2 Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour choisir Media Play USB puis sur la touche ENTER C Le menu Media Play USB s affiche a la touche MEDIA P de la t l commande pour afficher le menu yr Appuyez sur la touche SOURCE de la t l commande pour afficher la liste des sources Appuyez ensuite sur la touche A ou Y pour choisir USB an Photo Music Movie Setup SUM Appareil Retour CJ 0D C 3 Appuyez sur la touche rouge suivie de la touche A ou Y pour choisir la m moire USB Appuyez sur la touche ENTER Cette fonction varie selon de dispositif de m moire USB utilis Le nom du dispositif USB choisi s affiche dans l angle inf rieur gauche de l cran 4 Appuyez sur la touc
99. The Security Key input screen appears Enter the security key and press the Blue button on the remote control 4 If security encryption type is WEP 0 9 A F will be available when you input security key lt Move 0 9 Number C Enter D Return Wireless Network Setup If Security Key is already set In access point list select WPS You can select PBC PIN Security Key Select a network Move C Enter 5 Return Connecting by using PBC Select a PBC Push Button Configuration Press the PBC NE EE button on the AP access point within 2 minutes and wait for connection ai Cancel Press OK After input TV s Pincode in the access Connecting by using PIN Select a PIN Personal Identification Number points setup Access Po e AP_1 8 The message showing the PIN Code is displayed Input the PIN Code at AP PIN Code device within 2 minutes Select OK and wait for connection Try again if connecting operation doesn t work 4 When the connection is not established although tried again reset the access point Please refer to a manual of each access point Connecting by using Security Key When selecting Security Key the input window is Wireless Network Setup displayed Input the security key and press Blue button Security Key E Try again if connecting operation doesn t work T PE PE O Number EEEE UE EE EEE lt gt Move 0 9 Number C Enter 9 Return If Security Key is not s
100. The menu s left side has icons Picture Sound Channel Setup Input Application Support Mode Standard Backlight 7 95 45 50 50 Tint G R Advanced Settings 3 Press the A or Y button to select one of the icons English 5 Then press the ENTER C amp button to access the icon s sub menu P Te lode tandar Press the A or Y button to select the icon s submenu Backlight Contrast Brightness Sharpness Color Tint G R G50 R50 Advanced Settings Picture Options Press the lt or button to decrease or increase the value of a particular item The adjustment OSD may differ depending on the selected menu Backlight mi 7 v Move 4b Adjust C Enter D Return Press the ENTER C button to complete the configuration Press the EXIT button to exit le Sy English 6 a Plug amp Play Feature When the TV is initially powered on basic settings proceed automatically and subsequently 1 Press the POWER button on the remote control You can also use the POWER 5 button on the TV The message Select Language of the OSD is displayed 2 Press the ENTER 4 button Press the A or Y button to select the language then press the ENTER C4 button The message Select Home Use when installing this TV in Plug amp Play your home is displayed 3 Press the lt or gt button to select Store Demo or Home Use then press the ENTERL button The message Se
101. When software is upgraded video and audio settings you have made will return to their default factory settings We recommend you write down your settings so that you can easily reset them after the upgrade Move C3 Enter 9 Return By Online Upgrades the software using the Internet First configure your network For detailed procedures on using the Network Setup refer to the Setting the Network instructions see pages 30 35 If the internet connection doesn t operate properly connection can be broken please retry downloading If the problem still happens download by USB and upgrade Alternative Software Backup f there is an issue with the new firmware and it is affecting operation you can change the software to the previous version If software was changed existing software is displayed You can change current software to alternative software by Alternative Software HD Connection Guide This menu presents the connection method that provides the optimal quality for the HDTV Refer to this information when connecting external devices to the TV Contact Samsung View this information when your TV does not work properly or when you want to upgrade the software You can view the information regarding the call center product and software file download method English 37 MEDIA PLAY USB al Connecting a USB Device 1 Press the POWER button to turn the TV on TV Side Panel 2 Connect a USB device
102. a t Appuyez sur la touche verte pour annuler toutes les s lections Appuyez sur la touche rouge pour basculer entre les choix NYSE etNASDAQ NASDAQ R gler D pl CF Choisir D Retour 4 Pour compl ter la configuration appuyez sur la touche RETURN Fran ais 60 a Configuration d InfoLink 1 Appuyez sur la touche INFO L de la t l commande InfoLink s Setup 2 Appuyez sur la touche lt ou pour choisir Configuration puis sur ENTERC 3 Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour choisir l option voulue puis sur ENTERC ate eae Noir Pour quitter le service Configuration appuyez sur la touche RETURN Pour quitter le service InfoLink appuyez sur la touche EXIT InfoLink s Position D pl C Choisir D Retour Lancement auto D termine s il faut lancer automatiquement le mode InfoLink lorsque le t l viseur est sous tension Vous pouvez s lectionner Arr t ou Marche Dur e de l affichage D termine la dur e d affichage des nouvelles l cran Il est possible de s lectionner 4 heures 8 heures 10 heures ou Toujours Taille de la police Le service InfoLink permet de s lectionner Standard ou Grand Couleur arri re plan Permet de r gler la couleur de l arri re plan du service InfoLink La couleur s applique toutes les fen tres de service d option et de configuration InfoLink s Position Permet de r gler la position de chaque service InfoLink l cran La s lection peut s effectuer
103. a channel number Yellow Select Selects multiple channel lists You can perform the add delete or add to Favorite delete from Favorite function for multiple channels at the same time Select the required channels and press the yellow button to set all the selected channels at the same time The Y mark appears to the left of the selected channels TOOLS Tools Displays the Add or Delete Add to Favorite or Delete from Favorite Timer Viewing Channel Name Edit Select All or Deselect All and Auto Program menus The Options menus may differ depending on the situation Channel Status Display Icons v A channel selected by pressing the yellow button A program currently being broadcast _ Achannel set as a Favorite Areserved program Channel List Option Menu in All Channels Added Channels Favorite Press the TOOLS button to use the option menu Option menu items may differ depending on the channel status Add to Favorite ae ar You can delete or add a channel to display the channels you want d SEA All deleted channels will be shown on the All Channels menu A gray colored channel indicates the channel has been deleted The Add menu only appears for deleted channels You can also delete a channel from the Added Channels or Favorite menu in the same manner sjauueyd Ily English 14 Add to Favorite Delete from Favorite You can set channels you watch frequently as F
104. age En mode PC vous ne pouvez modifier que Nuance coul et Format dans Options EE Normal Format 16 9 R duct bruit num Auto d image Nuance coul Froide Normal Chaude Chaude Chaude3 Chaude1 Chaude2 ou Chaude3 ne s activent qu en mode image Cin ma Mode Film Off Mode bleu seu Off Les r glages peuvent tre d finis et m moris s pour chacun des appareils externes Auto Motion Plus 120Hz Standard branch s une entr e du t l viseur D p C Intro D Retour Format Il est possible de modifier la taille de l image l cran Votre t l viseur offre plusieurs options de format d cran chacune tant con ue pour fonctionner au mieux avec des types d entr es vid o particuli res Votre c blos lecteur ou r cepteur satellite peut galement disposer de ses propres tailles d cran En r gle g n rale toutefois il est conseill d utiliser le mode 16 9 autant que possible Il est possible d appuyer r p tition sur la touche P SIZE de la t l commande pour modifier la taille de l image 16 9 Pour r gler l image en mode 16 9 Zoom1 Permet d agrandir la taille de l image affich e l cran Zoom Agrandit davantage la taille de l image que Zoom1 Format large Augmente le facteur de forme de l image pour qu elle remplisse l cran en entier 4 3 R gle l image en mode normal c d 4 3 Plein cran Utilisez cette fonction pour voir l image en entier sans coupure dura
105. age is not stable and may Possible Solution If the setting is not correct use your computer utility program to change the display appear to vibrate when you have a computer connected to the PC input settings Your TV supports multiscan display functions within the following frequency domain Horizontal frequency KHz 30 60 Vertical frequency Hz 60 75 PC Maximum refresh rate at 60 Hz 1920 x 1080 Image is not centered on the screen Adjust the horizontal and vertical position The screen position must be adjusted on the output source i e STB with a digital signal The picture appears distorted in the corner of the screen If Screen Fit is selected with some external devices the picture may appear distorted in the corner of the screen This symptom is caused by the external devices not TV The Resets all settings to the default values message appears This appears when you press and hold the EXIT button for a while The product settings are reset to the factory defaults This TFT LCD panel uses a panel consisting of sub pixels 6 220 800 which require sophisticated technology to produce However there may be few bright or dark pixels on the screen These pixels will have no impact on the performance of the product T Installing the Stand The product color and shape may vary depending on the model Preset Place the Guide Stand and Cover Neck onto the stand and fasten it using
106. agrandie est plus petite que sa taille originale l cran le changement d emplacement ne fonctionne pas Le fichier agrandi n est pas sauvegard Q Musique de fond Vous pouvez choisir la musique de fond en regardant un diaporama Pour utiliser cette fonction de la musique et des photos doivent tre sauvegard s sur le dispositif USB Le chargement des fichiers musicaux est n cessaire pour modifier le mode BGM Lecture des fichiers musicaux dans la cat gorie charger Musique de fond Off On e Off La musique de fond n est pas lue e On Lorsque la musique de fond est accessible elle est lue lorsque vous choisissez On Mode mus de fond Ambiance Fichier s lect Lect al Vous pouvez choisir un mode pour la musique de fond Ambiance nergique Rythm Triste Stimulant Calme Non class s La musique d ambiance choisie est r gl e comme musique de fond Si vous r glez le Mode mus de fond Ambiance vous pouvez choisir une ambiance S l Fichier musical 0 Fich S l Seul le fichier choisi est r gl comme musique de fond Si vous r glez le Mode mus de fond Fichier s lect vous pouvez choisir un fichier musical Q R glage de l image R glage du son Vous pouvez choisir les r glages de l image et les r glages sonores Q Information L information du fichier photo s affiche Q Supp s curit ll est possible de retirer le dispositif du t l viseur de fa on s re Fran ais
107. al Speakers Audio Out Optical L R Out to Sound System RF AV Component PC HDMI RF AV Component PC HDMI TV Speaker Sound Output Sound Output External Speaker Mute Sound Output Video No Signal Mute Mute Q Sound Select Main Sub When the PIP feature is activated you can listen to the sound of the sub PIP picture You can select this option when PIP is set to On A Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu You can also set the sound of the sub picture by selecting Tools PIP Sound Select Q Sound Reset Reset All Reset Sound Mode Cancel You can restore the Sound settings to the factory defaults SLUM Reset Sound Mode Current sound values return to default settings Select the sound reset options Reset All Reset Sound Mode 4 Move Enter 9 Return English 24 SETUP You can set up additional functions Configuring the Setup Menu Q Language You can set the menu language Plug amp Play Language English Q Time For detailed procedures on setting up options refer to the Setting the Time instructions see pages 28 29 Caption Q Game Mode Off On When connecting to a game console such as PlayStation or Xbox you can enjoy a more realistic gaming experience by selecting game menu Restrictions on game mode Caution To disconnect the game console and connect another external device set Game Mode to Off in the setup menu
108. an connect the LAN via a Sharer Router You The Modem Port on the Wall External Modem TV Rear Panel ADSL VDSL Cable TV IP Sharer MT AUDIO J DER ij Modem Cable LAN Cable LAN Cable can connect the LAN port and the TV directly depending on your network status The LAN Port on the Wall TV Rear Panel LAN Cable SES e BB The terminals the position of the port and the type of the external device may differ depending on the manufacturer If the IP address allocation by the DHCP server has failed turn the external modem off turn it on again after at least 10 seconds and then try again For the connections between the external modem and the Sharer Router refer to the owner s manual of the corresponding product You can connect the TV to the LAN directly without connecting it through a Sharer Router You cannot use a manual connection type ADSL modem because it does not support DHCP You have to use an automatic connection type ADSL modem English 30 LAN Connection for Static IP Environment The procedures to set up the network using a static IP address are described below You have to manually enter the IP address subnet mask gateway and DNS that are provided by your Internet Service Provider ISP 1 Connect the LAN port on the rear panel of the TV and the LAN port on the wall using the LAN cable The LAN Port on the
109. an remove the device safely from the TV English 53 a Using the Setup Menu Setup displays the user settings of the Media Play menu 1 Press the MEDIA P button 2 Press the lt or gt button to select Setup then press the ENTER C button 3 Press the A or Y button to select the desired option 4 Press the lt or button to select the desired option To exit Media Play mode press the MEDIA P button on the remote control Music Movie Setup Use Color View On Off You can select sorting photos by Color If this option is set to On the loading time may be increased to collect Color information from the photos Exit Use Color View 4 Continuous Movie Play Help On Off Continuous Movie Play Help Select to display the help pop up message for continuous movie playback E el pl y p p p p g p y d Get DivX R VOD deactivation code A y m Screen Saver Run Time 4 hours Get DivX VOD registration code E Shows the registration code authorized for the TV If you connect to the DivX web site Safe Remove and register the registration code with a personal account you can download the VOD registration file If you play the VOD registration using Media Play the registration is completed For more information on DivX VOD visit www DivX com Get DivX VOD deactivation code When DivX VOD is not registered the registration deactivation code is displayed If you execute this function when DivX VOD is registered the cur
110. anal normales Placez l interrupteur A B en position B pour une regarder les canal crypt es Lorsque vous placez l interrupteur A B sur B vous devez syntoniser votre t l vision sur la canal de sortie de la bo te de jonction qui est habituellement la canal 3 ou 4 Fran ais 9 il Affichage du panneau de branchement Pan La couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du mod le neau arri re R seau de cablodistribution ENTREE D ALIMENTATION Sert brancher le cordon d alimentation fourni Selon le mod le l emplacement de ENTREE D ALIMENTATION peut tre diff rent HDMI IN 1 DVI 2 3 DVI AUDIO IN R AUDIO L brancher la prise HDMI d un appareil dot d une sortie HDMI Aucune connexion audio n est n cessaire entre deux appareils HDMI Qu est ce que le mode HDMI 0 HDMI ou high definition multimedia interface interface multim dia haute d finition est une interface permettant la transmission de signaux num riques audio et vid o l aide d un seul c ble La diff rence entre les interfaces HDMI et DVI r side dans le fait qu un appareil HDMI est plus petit et qu il est dot du composante de codage HDCP protection contre la copie num rique large bande passante Le t l viseur peut n mettre aucun son et les couleurs des images peuvent tre anormales lorsqu un lecteur DVD Blu 5 S ray
111. apt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission other than the making of an exact copy The resulting work is called a modified version of the earlier work or a work based on the earlier work A covered work means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program To propagate a work means to do anything with it that without permission would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy Propagation includes copying distribution with or without modification making available to the public and in some countries other activities as well To convey a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies Mere interaction with a user through a computer network with no transfer of a copy is not conveying An interactive user interface displays Appropriate Legal Notices to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that 1 displays an appropriate copyright notice and 2 tells the user that there is no warranty for the work except to the extent that warranties are provided that licensees may convey the work under this License and how to view a copy of this License If the interface presents a list of user commands or options such as a menu a prominent item in the list meets this criterion 1 Source Code Th
112. ashing You can change the opacity of the letter English 27 e Background Opacity This option consists of Default Transparent Translucent Solid and Flashing You can change the background opacity of the caption Return to Default This option sets each of Size Font Style Foreground Color Background Color Foreground Opacity and Background Opacity to its default Digital Caption Options are available only when Default and Service1 Service6 can be selected in Caption Mode The availability of captions depends on the program being broadcast Default means to follow the standard set by the broadcaster Foreground and Background cannot be set to have the same color Foreground Opacity and Background Opacity cannot be both set to Transparent Q Melody Off Low Medium High A melody sound can be set to come on when the TV is powered On or Off The Melody does not play When no sound is output from the TV because the MUTE button has been pressed When no sound is output from the TV because the volume has been reduced to minimum with the VOL button When the TV is turned off by Sleep Timer function Q Energy Saving Off Low Medium High Auto This feature adjusts the brightness of the TV in order to reduce power consumption When watching TV at night set the Energy Saving mode option to High to reduce eye fatigue as well as power consumption Q PIP For detailed procedures on setting up options refer to th
113. atent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11 However if you cease all violation of this License then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated a provisionally unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license and b permanently if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation Moreover your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License for any work from that copyright holder and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10 Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer to peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance However nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate o
114. ation Information But this requirement does not apply if neither you nor any third party retains the ability to install modified object code on the User Product for example the work has been installed in ROM The requirement to provide Installation Information does not include a requirement to continue to provide support service warranty or updates for a work that has been modified or installed by the recipient or for the User Product in which it has been modified or installed Access to a network may be denied when the modification itself materially and adversely affects the operation of the network or violates the rules and protocols for communication across the network Corresponding Source conveyed and Installation Information provided in accord with this section must be in a format that is publicly documented and with an implementation available to the public in source code form and must require no special password or key for unpacking reading or copying Additional Terms Additional permissions are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License to the extent that they are valid under applicable law If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program that part may be used separately under those permissions but the entire Program remain
115. ation de l option Weather 4 Appuyez sur la touche rouge pendant que vous utilisez le service pour modifier l option M t o du service 5 Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y et s lectionnez l option M t o Pour quitter le service M t o appuyez sur la touche bleue Pour quitter le service InfoLink appuyez sur la touche EXIT Fran ais 59 il Utilisation de l objet News Service amp Le fournisseur de nouvelles peut tre modifi ult rieurement 1 Appuyez sur la touche INFO L de la t l commande 2 Appuyez sur la touche ou pour vous d placer sur le service Nouvelles et appuyez sur ENTER C Appuyez sur la touche ENTER C amp pour voir le d tail de l objet Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour voir l objet pr c dent ou suivant 3 Appuyez sur la touche rouge pendant que vous utilisez le service pour modifier l option Nouvelles du service 4 Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y et s lectionnez l option de service Nouvelles L option de service News varie en fonction du service Web fourni amp Pour quitter le service Nouvelles appuyez sur la touche bleue Pour quitter le service InfoLink appuyez sur la touche EXIT a Utilisation de l objet Stock Service 1 Appuyez sur la touche INFO L de la t l commande 2 Appuyez sur la touche ou pour vous d placer sur le service Actions et appuyez sur ENTER L 3 Appuyez sur la touche rouge pendant que vous utilisez le service pour modifier l option Actions du service
116. ation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it or c Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version or d Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material or e Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names trademarks or service marks or f Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that material by anyone who conveys the material or modified versions of it with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors All other non permissive additional terms are considered further restrictions within the meaning of section 10 If the Program as you received it or any part of it contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction you may remove that term If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying If you add terms
117. atique ou DHCP pour tablir la connexion au r seau sans fil L adaptateur LAN sans fil de Samsung prend en charge IEEE 802 11A IEEE 802 11B IEEE 802 116 IEEE 802 11N Activez la fonction de connexion Ping si le routeur IP sans fil permet de l activer et la d sactiver S lectionnez un canal inutilis pour le routeur IP sans fil Si ce canal est utilis par un autre appareil il y aura des interf rences et la communication pourrait chouer Si un autre syst me de s curit que ceux indiqu s ci dessous est appliqu il ne fonctionnera pas sur le t l viseur L application de la cl de s curit pour le routeur AP routeur IP sans fil est compatible uniquement avec les param tres suivants 1 Mode d authentification OPEN SHARED WPAPSK WPA2PSK 2 Type de cryptage WEP TKIP AES L application de la cl de s curit pour le mode Ad hoc est compatible uniquement avec les param tres suivants 1 Mode d authentification SHARED WPANONE 2 Type de cryptage WEP TKIP AES Si votre AP prend en charge WPS Configuration Wi Fi prot g e vous pouvez vous connecter au r seau l aide de la configuration par touches PBC ou d un NIP num ro d identification personnel PIN WPS configurera automatiquemt les cl s SSID et WPA peu importe le mode Si l appareil n est pas certifi il ne peut pas tre connect au t l viseur Samsung l aide de l adaptateur LAN sans fil de Samsung Fran ais 32 al Configurat
118. au Configuration du r seau sans fil R glage autom Si vous d sirez brancher un point d acc s le point d acc s doit prendre en charge le protocole de configuration de l h te dynamique DHCP Seuls les appareils prenant en charge le mode R glage M menet paglage aami Ad hoc peuvent tre branch s sans DHCP Test du r seau S lectionnez un r seau Configuration du r seau sans fil 1 R glez l option Type de r seau Sans fil 2 S lectionnez Configuration du r seau sans fil 3 R glez l option R glage pr Internet R glage autom Le protocole Internet est r gl automatiquement Choisissez un r seau partir de l option S lectionnez un r seau S lectionnez Test du r seau pour v rifier la connectivit du r seau D pl Intro D Retour Configuration du r seau sans fil R glage manuel 1 R glez l option Type de r seau Sans fil Configuration du r seau sans fil 2 S lectionnez Configuration du r seau sans fil al SEE 3 R glez l option R glage pr Internet R glage manuel Selesionneztinreseal 4 Configurez les fonctions Adresse IP Masque de sous r seau Passerelle et Serveur ee DNS Passerelle Appuyez sur les touches num riques de la t l commande pour configurer le r seau e manuellement MER ER Choisissez un r seau partir de l option S lectionnez un r seau 6 S lectionnez Test du r seau pour v rifier la connectivit du r seau Fran ais 35 ENTR E SUPPORT TECH
119. au mode d emploi de la carte vid o sinon l image pourrait ne pas appara tre Pour les modes d affichage de la page suivante l image de l cran a t optimis e en usine Entr e D Sub et HDMI DVI Il faut utiliser la prise d entr e HDMI IN 1 DVI dans le cas d un branchement au cable HDMI DVI 2 r Fr quence horizontale Fr quence verticale Fr quence d horloge Polarit Moce section kHz Hz des pixels MHz synchro H V ine 640 x 350 31 469 70 086 25 175 720 x 400 31 469 70 087 28 322 l 640 x 480 35 000 66 667 30 240 4 MAC 832 x 624 49 726 74 551 57 284 J 1152 x 870 68 681 75 062 400 000 720 x 576 35 910 59 950 32 750 1152 x 864 53 783 59 959 81 750 VESACVT 1280 x 720 44 772 59 855 74 500 1280 x 720 56 456 74 777 95 750 1280 x 960 75 231 74 857 130 000 640 x 480 31 469 59 940 25 175 J 640 x 480 37 861 72 809 31 500 J 640 x 480 37 500 75 000 31 500 J 800 x 600 37 879 60 317 40 000 800 x 600 48 077 72 188 50 000 800 x 600 46 875 75 000 49 500 1024 x 768 48 363 60 004 65 000 Je 1024 x 768 56 476 70 069 75 000 J 1024 x 768 60 023 75 029 78 750 VESADMT 1152 x 864 67 500 75 000 108 000 1280 x 1024 63 981 60 020 108 000 1280 x 1024 79 976 75 025 135 000 1280 x 800 49 702 59 810 83 500 1280 x 800 62 795 74 934 106 500 1280 x 960 60 000 60 000 108 000 1360 x 768 47 712 60 015 85 500 1440 x 900 55 935 59 887 106 500 1440 x 900 70
120. avant d installer votre t l viseur Nous n assumons aucune responsabilit pour les erreurs typographiques ou d impression 2009 Samsung Electronics America Inc Fran ais 71 LN37B650 7 VUE DE DESSUS TI i DETAILS DU PANNEAU DE PRISES 3 1 j 36 5 ke 20 5 1 fF 100 74 VUE AVANT VUE LATERALE 7 9 200 mm T 7 9 200 mm o ol VUE ARRI RE REMARQUE Tous les dessins ne sont pas n cessairement des repr sentations l chelle Certaines dimensions peuvent avoir t chang es sans avis Mesurez les dimensions avant d installer votre t l viseur Nous n assumons aucune responsabilit pour les erreurs typographiques ou d impression 2009 Samsung Electronics America Inc Fran ais 72 LN40B630 E o VUE DE DESSUS fe DETAILS DU PANNEAU DE PRISES 3 1 I 39 2 k VUE AVANT VUE LAT RALE l 7 9 200 mm VUE ARRI RE REMARQUE Tous les dessins ne sont pas n cessairement des repr sentations l chelle Certaines dimensions peuvent avoir t chang es sans avis Mesurez les dimensions avant d installer votre t l viseur Nous n assumons aucune responsabilit pour les erreurs typographiques ou d impression 2009 Samsung Electronics America In
121. avorite A Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu You can also set the add to or delete from Favorites by selecting Tools Add to Favorite or Delete from Favorite amp The symbol will be displayed and the channel will be set as a favorite amp All favorite channels will be shown on Favorite menu Timer Viewing f you reserve a program you want to watch the channel is automatically switched to the reserved channel in the Channel List even when you are watching another channel To reserve a program set the current time first Only memorized channels can be reserved You can set the channel day month year hour and minute directly by pressing the number buttons on the remote control Reserving a program will be shown in the Programmed menu Digital Program Guide and Viewing Reservation When a digital channel is selected and you press the button the Program Guide for the channel appears You can reserve a program according to the procedures described above Channel Name Edit analog channels only Channels can labeled so that their call letters appear whenever the channel is selected The names of digital broadcasting channels are automatically assigned and cannot be labeled Select All Deselect All e Select All You can select all the channels in the channel list e Deselect All You can deselect all the selected channels You can only select Deselect All when there is a selected channel
122. ay menu etc MEDIA P Allows you to play music files pictures and movies INFO Press to display information on the TV screen MTS Press to choose stereo mono or Separate Audio Program SAP broadcast Use these buttons in the Media Play and Anynet modes e This remote can be used to control recording on Samsung recorders with the Anynet feature ON OFF 5 Pressing the ON OFF light button toggles between on and off When the remote control is on and a button is pressed on the remote control the remote control buttons will be lit for a moment Using the remote control with the ON OFF light button set to On will reduce the battery usage time PRE CH Enables you to return to the previous channel you were watching MUTE x Press to temporarily cut off the sound V CHA Press to change channels MENU Displays the main on screen menu FAV CH Press to switch to your favorite channels RETURN Returns to the previous menu UPA DOWNY LEFT lt RIGHT gt ENTERC amp Use to select on screen menu items and change menu values EXIT Press to exit the menu SRS Selects SRS TruSurround HD mode P SIZE Picture size selection CC Controls the caption decoder English 4 il Viewing the Remote Control SAMSUNG ial Installing Batteries in
123. back of the TV If this happens contact the company that provided the DVD Blu ray player Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box to confirm the HDMI version then request an upgrade HDMI cables that are not 1 3 may cause annoying flicker or no screen display Use the HDMI IN 1 DVI jack for DVI connection to an external device Use a DVI to HDMI cable or DVI HDMI adapter DVI to HDMI for video connection and the DVI AUDIO IN R AUDIO L jacks for audio When using an HDMI DVI cable connection you must use the HDMI IN 1 DVI jack ANTIN Connects to an antenna or cable TV system SS English 10 DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL O00 OO SE or w Y KENSINGTON LOCK The Kensington Lock optional is a device used to physically fix the system when used in a public place If you want to use a locking device contact the dealer where you purchased the TV The location of the Kensington Lock may be different depending on its model COMPONENT IN 1 2 AV IN 1 Connects Component video audio The COMPONENT IN 1 jack is also used as the AV IN 1 jack 2 Z Z Connect the video cable to the COMPONENT IN 1 Y VIDEO jack and the audio cable to the COMPONENT IN 1 R AUDIO L jacks If you have a mono non stereo VCR use a Y connector not supplied to connect to the right and left audio input jacks of the TV Alternatively
124. brillance du r tro clairage de l affichage ACL 7 Contraste R gle le niveau de contraste de l image Luminosit R gle le niveau de luminosit de l image Nettet R gle la d finition du bord de l image Couleur R gle la saturation des couleurs de l image Teinte V R R gle la teinte de couleur de l image Lorsque vous apportez des modifications Contre jour Contraste Luminosit Nettet Couleur ou Teinte V R l image s ajuste en cons quence En mode PC il est possible de modifier uniquement les fonctions Contre jour Contraste et Luminosit Les r glages peuvent tre d finis et m moris s pour chacun des appareils externes branch s une entr e du t l viseur Il est possible de r duire consid rablement la consommation d nergie en diminuant le niveau de brillance de l image ce qui diminue galement les co ts de fonctionnement D pl 4 gt R glage C Intro 2 Retour we ee Q R glages avanc s Les nouveaux t l viseurs Samsung permettent d effectuer des r glages d image encore plus R glages avanc s pr cis que les mod les pr c dents Tonalit noire of R glages avanc s est offert dans les modes Standard ou Cin ma re DO poe Gamma 0 En mode PC seules les fonctions Contraste dynam Gamma quilibrage du blanc Espace couleur Standard peuvent tre modifi es parmi les l ments de R glages avanc s quilibrage du blanc Ton chair 0 Am lioration des bords On
125. c Fran ais 73 LN46B630 a VUE DE DESSUS 1 LAN 7 peus ORO 5 il Tr Av0 voeo D TAILS DU PANNEAU DE PRISES 3 1 I 44 0 k f 21 7 j Fos VUE AVANT VUE LAT RALE 15 7 400 mm msn 15 7 400 mm a VUE ARRIERE REMARQUE Tous les dessins ne sont pas n cessairement des repr sentations l chelle Certaines dimensions peuvent avoir t chang es sans avis Mesurez les dimensions avant d installer votre t l viseur Nous n assumons aucune responsabilit pour les erreurs typographiques ou d impression 2009 Samsung Electronics America Inc Fran ais 74 LN52B630 a VUE DE DESSUS S J LAN e Oo Q AvvI0 DETAILS DU PANNEAU DE PRISES 3 1 I 49 7 gt ko 34 5 j TE o Eao VUE AVANT VUE LAT RALE 32 3 15 7 400 mm 15 7 400 mm a VUE ARRIERE REMARQUE Tous les dessins ne sont pas n cessairement des repr sentations l chelle Certaines dimensions peuvent avoir t chang es sans avis Mesurez les dimensions avant d installer votre t l viseur Nous n assumons aucune responsabilit pour les erreurs typographiques ou d impression 2009 Samsung Electronics America Inc
126. cable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996 or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures When you convey a covered work you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing against the work s users your or third parties legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures Conveying Verbatim Copies You may convey verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee Conveying Modified Source Versions You may convey a work based on the Program or the modifications to produce it from the Program in the form of source code under the terms of section 4 provided that you also meet all of th
127. ce r glage pour les canaux diffus s en st r ophonie SAP Choisissez ce r glage pour couter une mission diffus e en mode SAP seconde piste audio habituellement un doublage en langue trang re Son multi piste n est disponible qu en mode analogique Selon l mission diffus e il est possible de choisir parmi les modes Mono St r o ou SAP oer eB 5 5 Fran ais 23 Q Volume auto Off On Chaque station de diffusion poss de son propre type de signal il n est donc pas facile de r gler le volume chaque fois que l on change de canal Cette fonction permet de r gler automatiquement le volume de canal d sir en abaissant la sortie de son lorsque le signal de modulation est lev ou en haussant la sortie de son lorsque le signal de modulation est bas QO S lect le haut parleur Lorsque vous coutez un t l viseur branch une cha ne de cin ma maison coupez le son des haut parleurs du t l viseur afin d entendre celui des haut parleurs externes de la cha ne e Haut p externe Permet d entendre le son partir des haut parleurs externes cha ne de cin ma maison Haut parleur TV Permet d entendre le son partir des haut parleurs du t l viseur Les touches de volume et MUTE ne fonctionnent pas lorsque la fonction S lect le haut parleur est r gl e Haut p externe Veuillez r gler le volume de votre cha ne de cin ma maison Si vous choisissez Haut p externe dans le menu S lec
128. censes gt The GNU General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs If your program is a subroutine library you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library If this is what you want to do use the GNU Lesser General Public License instead of this License But first please read lt http www gnu org philosophy why not lgpl htmI gt a GNU Lesser General Public License LGPL Version 3 29 June 2007 Copyright C 2007 Free Software Foundation Inc lt http fsf org gt Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document but changing it is not allowed Preamble The GNU General Public License is a free copyleft license for software and other kinds of works The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program to make sure it remains free software for all its users We the Free Software Foundation use the GNU General Public License for most of our software it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distrib
129. che PBC au dessus du point d acc s pendant 2 minutes Attendez eae ata eas ai que la connexion s tablisse Branchement l aide de NIP Choisissez un NIP num ro d identification personnel Appuyez sur OK apr s avoir entr le code NIP pour configurer wos x oe lepor i Un message affiche le NIP Saisissez le NIP au point d acc s du dispositif dans Nom Dou NIP 1 les 2 minutes suivant l affichage du message Choisissez OK et attendez que la connexion s tablisse Essayez de nouveau si la connexion choue Lorsqu il est impossible d tablir la connexion apr s plusieurs tentatives r initialisez le point d acc s Veuillez consulter le guide pertinent pour change point d acc s Effacer 5 5 Configuration du r seau sans fil Branchement l aide de Code de s curit Lorsque vous choisissez Code de s curit la fen tre de saisie s affiche Saisissez la cl de s curit et appuyez sur la touche Bleu Supprimer Essayez de nouveau si la connexion ne fonctionne pas ae Et Code de s curit D pl 0 9 Num ro 4 Intro D Retour Configuration du r seau sans fil e Sila Code de s curit n est pas configur e Si le r glage de s curit du point d acc s prenant en charge la WPS est fix Aucun vous pouvez s lectionner PBC NIP Aucune s curit L option Aucune s curit vous permet de vous connecter un point d acc s QE sans utiliser la fonction WPS
130. ci avant la prise optique alimente uniquement les p riph riques audio 2 canaux Vous entendrez du son uniquement au niveau des haut parleurs gauche et droit avant de votre cha ne de cin ma maison et du caisson d extr mes graves Pour avoir le son en 5 1 canaux branchez la prise de sortie DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL du r cepteur DVD ou satellite c d l appareil Anynet 1 ou 2 directement l amplificateur ou la cha ne de cin ma maison et non au t l viseur Connexion uniquement une cha ne de cin ma maison Il est possible de brancher un appareil Anynet l aide du c ble HDMI 1 3 Certains c bles HDMI ne prennent pas en charge des fonctions Anynet Anynet fonctionne lorsque l appareil AV compatible avec Anynet est en mode Veille ou en mode Marche Anynet prend en charge jusqu 12 appareils audiovisuels Vous pouvez connecter jusqu 3 appareils du m me type 5 5 Ss Frangais 55 a Configuration de la fonction Anynett A Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils Vous pouvez galement afficher le menu Anynett en s lectionnant Outils gt Anynet HDMI CEC eatin lea M Anynet HDMI CEC uoneajddy InfoLink Q Configuration Anynett HDMI CEC Arr t Marche Pour utiliser la fonction Anynet Anynet HDMI CEC doit tre Marche Lorsque la fonction Anynet HDMI CEC est d sactiv e toutes les op rations Anynet connexes sont d sactiv es Aynet Configurati
131. compagne ce guide de l utilisateur est fabriqu sous licence en vertu de droits de propri t intellectuelle de certaines tierces parties Ce produit est prot g en vertu des brevets am ricains suivants 5 991 715 5 740 317 4 972 484 5 214 678 5 323 396 5 539 829 5 606 618 5 530 655 5 777 992 6 289 308 5 610 985 5 481 643 5 544 247 5 960 037 6 023 490 5 878 080 et en vertu de la demande de brevet n 2001 44713 A1 publi e aux Etats Unis Cette licence permet aux consommateurs d utiliser le contenu sous licence a des fins non commerciales Aucun droit n est accord l gard d une utilisation commerciale Cette licence ne couvre aucun autre appareil que celui ci et ne s applique pas aux produits non pourvus d une licence ni tout processus conforme la norme ISO IEC 11172 3 ou ISO IEC 13818 3 utilis ou vendu de pair avec ce produit La licence ne couvre que l utilisation de cet appareil des fins d encodage et ou de d codage de fichiers audio conform ment la norme ISO IEC 11172 3 ou ISO IEC 13818 3 Aucun droit n est accord en vertu de cette licence en ce qui a trait aux caract ristiques ou fonctions du produit qui ne sont pas conformes la norme ISO IEC 11172 3 ou ISO IEC 13818 3 e Autres pays L appareil qui accompagne ce guide de l utilisateur est fabriqu sous licence en vertu de droits de propri t intellectuelle de certaines tierces parties Cette licence permet aux consommateurs d utiliser le contenu sous licenc
132. ction Liste des fichiers Appuyez sur SUM Apparel BW R gliav wChoisr F Outs D Retour a touche gt Lecture ENTER C pour lancer le diaporama dans l ordre que vous avez choisi Pour passer au groupe pr c dent ou suivant appuyez sur la touche lt lt REW ou gt gt FF L information relative la photo se r gle automatiquement L information sur la couleur extraite d un fichier photo peut tre diff rente de ce quoi vous vous attendez Vous pouvez modifier la couleur et les pr f rences PTP ne prend pas en charge le mode de classement par dossier Q Aff de base Affiche les dossiers du dispositif de m moire USB Lorsque vous choisissez un dossier et que vous appuyez sur la touche ENTER G4 seuls les fichiers photo du dossier choisi sont affich s amp I n est pas possible de r gler les fichiers favoris dans le classement Aff de base Q P date Les photos sont class es par date Elles sont class es par mois et par ann e partir de la photo la plus r cente Q Couleur Rouge Jaune Vert Bleu Magenta Noir Gris Non class s Les photos sont class es par couleur Il est possible de modifier l information de couleur d une photo Activez l option Utiliser laff Couleur du menu Setup avant de classer les photos par couleur Q Dossier Les photos sont class es par dossier S il y a beaucoup de dossiers dans le dispositif USB les fichiers photo s
133. ction Source est r gl e sur USB Vous pouvez choisir un dossier sur le dispositif USB qui contienne les fichiers musicaux ou photo lire au moment de la mise sous tension automatique du t l viseur Si le nom du dossier est trop long il ne peut tre s lectionn Si vous utilisez deux dispositifs USB de m me type assurez vous que les noms de dossier sont diff rents afin que le dispositif USB appropri soit lu R p ter Choisir Une fois chaque jour Lun Ven Lun Sam Sam Dim ou Manuel Si vous choisissez l option Manuel appuyez sur la touche pour choisir le jour appropri de la semaine Appuyez sur ENTERC amp sur le jour voulu et la marque w s affichera Vous pouvez r gler les heures les minutes et les canaux directement l aide du pav num rique de la t l commande Mise hors tension automatique Quand la minuterie marche est activ e le t l viseur s teint automatiquement au bout de trois heures apr s la mise sous tension par la minuterie si aucune commande n est transmise au t l viseur Cette fonction est seulement disponible en mode Minuterie marche et vite toute surchauffe lorsque le t l viseur est sous tension pendant une p riode prolong e Fran ais 29 Connexion au r seau Vous pouvez configurer le protocole Internet IP pour communiquer avec diff rents r seaux connect s Q Connexion au r seau Cable Connexion LAN pour un environnement DHCP Les proc dures de configuration d
134. d through a receiver instead of the TV speaker 1 Press the TOOLS button Press the ENTER C4 button to select Anynett HDMI CEC 2 Press the A or Y button to select Receiver Press the lt or button to select On or Off Move Enter 5 Return Recording DVDR 3 Press the EXIT button to exit ae If your receiver supports audio only it may not appear in the device list The receiver will work when you have properly connected the optical in jack of the receiver to the DIGITAL AUDIO OUT OPTICAL jack of the TV When the receiver home theater is set to On you can hear sound output from Move CSEnter 9 Return the TV s Optical jack When the TV is displaying a DTV air signal the TV will send out 5 1 channel sound to the Home Theater receiver When the source is a digital component such as a DVD and is connected to the TV via HDMI only 2 channel sound will be heard from the Home Theater receiver If there is a power interruption to the TV when the Receiver is set to On by disconnecting the power cord or a power failure the Speaker Select may be set to External Speaker when you turn the TV on again English 57 i Troubleshooting for Anynet Problem Possible Solution Anynet does not work Check if the device is an Anynett device The Anynett system supports Anynett devices only Connect only one receiver home theater Check if the Anynet device power cord is properl
135. de Q Channel List For detailed procedures on using the Channel List refer to the Managing Channels instructions see pages 14 15 You can select these options by simply pressing the CH LIST button on the remote control Q Fine Tune analog channels only Use fine tuning to manually adjust a particular channel for optimal reception If you do not store the fine tuned channel in memory adjustments are not saved will appear next to the name of fine tuned channels To reset the fine tuning setting press the Y button to select Reset then press the ENTER C amp button English 13 D Managing Channels Using this menu you can add delete or set favorite channels and use the program guide for digital broadcasts 2 Ar h4 Air Y 4 2 vT 3 Air All Channels Shows all currently available channels gt a 8 a a gt Fd 5 5 ER 3 Alice s Adventures in Wonderland Added Channels Shows all added channels Favorite Shows all favorite channels To select the favorite channels you have set up press the FAV CH button on the remote control Programmed Shows all current reserved programs Select a channel in the All Channels Added Channels or Favorite screen by pressing the A Y buttons and pressing the ENTER LC button Then you can watch the selected channel Using the color buttons with the Channel List Red Antenna Switches to Air or Cable Green Zoom Enlarges or shrinks
136. dio HDMI 1 3 de l appareil Anynet e V rifier si la fonction Anynett HDMI CEC est r gl e Marche dans le menu Configuration d Anynet e V rifier si la t l commande est en mode TV V rifier s il s agit de la t l commande exclusive Anynett e Anynett ne fonctionne pas dans certaines conditions recherche de canaux utilisation de Media Play Pr t l emploi etc e Au moment du branchement ou du d branchement du c ble HDMI 1 3 s assurer d effectuer une nouvelle d tection des appareils ou de mettre le t l viseur hors tension et le red marrer e V rifier si la fonction Anynett de l appareil Anynet est activ e Je souhaite lancer Anynet e V rifier si l appareil Anynett est correctement branch au t l viseur et si la fonction Anynet HDMI CEC est Marche dans le menu de configuration d Anynett e Appuyer sur la touche TV de la t l commande du t l viseur pour permuter vers le t l viseur Appuyer ensuite sur la touche TOOLS pour afficher le menu Anynet et s lectionner le menu d sir Je souhaite quitter Anynet e S lectionner Regarder t l viseur dans le menu Anynet e Appuyer sur la touche SOURCE de la t l commande du t l viseur pour s lectionner un appareil autre que les appareils Anynett e Appuyer sur les touches W CH A CH LIST PRE CH et FAV CH pour changer de mode au t l viseur Remarque la touche des canaux ne fonctionne que si aucun appareil syntoniseur int gr Anynet n
137. does not terminate the licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under this License If your rights have been terminated and not permanently reinstated you do not qualify to receive new licenses for the same material under section 10 Acceptance Not Required for Having Copies You are not required to accept this License in order to receive or run a copy of the Program Ancillary propagation of a covered work occurring solely as a consequence of using peer to peer transmission to receive a copy likewise does not require acceptance However nothing other than this License grants you permission to propagate or modify any covered work These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or propagating a covered work you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients Each time you convey a covered work the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors to run modify and propagate that work subject to this License You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License An entity transaction is a transaction transferring control of an organization or substantially all assets of one or subdividing an organization or merging organizations If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives
138. e Viewing Picture in Picture instructions see page 20 i Setting the Time Q Clock Setting the clock is necessary in order to use the various timer features of the TV HER Language English The current time will appear every time you press the INFO button If you disconnect the power cord you have to set the clock again of Time Clock Mode as You can set up the current time manually or automatically V Chip e Auto Set the current time automatically using the time from the digital broadcast iy Medium e Manual Set the current time to a manually specified time un Depending on the broadcast station and signal the auto time may not be set correctly If this occurs set the time manually gouie Off The Antenna or cable must be connected in order to set the time automatically Clock Set You can set the current time manually This function is only available when Clock Mode is set to Manual SMove C Enter 5 Return You can set the month day year hour and minute directly by pressing the number buttons on the remote control Time Zone Select your time zone This function is only available when Clock Mode is set to Auto DST Daylight Saving Time Off On Auto Switches the Daylight Saving Time function on or off This function is only available when Clock Mode is set to Auto English 28 Q Sleep Timer The sleep timer automatically shuts off the TV after a preset time
139. e source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it Object code means any non source form of a work A Standard Interface means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body or in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language one that is widely used among developers working in that language The System Libraries of an executable work include anything other than the work as a whole that a is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component but which is not part of that Major Component and b serves only to enable use of the work with that Major Component or to implement a Standard Interface for which an implementation is available to the public in source code form A Major Component in this context means a major essential component kernel window system and so on of the specific operating system if any on which the executable work runs or a compiler used to produce the work or an object code interpreter used to run it The Corresponding Source for a work in object code form means all the source code needed to generate install and for an executable work run the object code and to modify the work including scripts to control those activities However it does not include the work s System Libraries or general purpose tools or generally available free programs which are used unmodi
140. e You can view the information of photo files during a SlideShow using the same WFO at WTS procedures Press the INFO button to viewing the information Q Safe Remove You can remove the device safely from the TV English 42 il Viewing a Photo or Slide Show Viewing a Slide Show 1 Press the Y button to select the File List Section 2 Press the TOOLS button 3 Press the A or Y button to select Slide Show then press the ENTERC amp button TE All files in the File List Section will be used for the Slide Show During the slide show files are displayed in order from the currently shown file The Slide Show progresses in the order sorted in the File List Section Music files can be automatically played during the Slide Show if the Background Music is set to On While a photo list is displayed press the gt Play ENTER C button on the remote control to start slide show SlideShow Control Buttons a b Normal 1234 jpg 580x765 2008 12 02 5 15 B iS Button Operations ENTER Play Pause the Slide Show EES in Shes G gt Play the Slide Show m Pause the Slide Show E Exit Slide Show and return to the photo list aa gt gt Change the SlideShow playing speed TOOLS Run various functions from the Photo menus Playing current group 1 Press the A button to move to the Sort key Section Press the lt or gt button to select a
141. e a des fins non commerciales Aucun droit n est accord a l gard d une utilisation commerciale Cette licence ne couvre aucun autre appareil que celui ci et ne s applique pas aux produits non pourvus d une licence ni tout processus conforme la norme ISO IEC 11172 3 ou ISO IEC 13818 3 utilis ou vendu de pair avec ce produit La licence ne couvre que l utilisation de cet appareil des fins d encodage et ou de d codage de fichiers audio conform ment la norme ISO IEC 11172 3 ou ISO IEC 13818 3 Aucun droit n est accord en vertu de cette licence en ce qui a trait aux caract ristiques ou fonctions du produit qui ne sont pas conformes la norme ISO IEC 11172 3 ou ISO IEC 13818 3 e ENONCE DE GARANTIE LIMIT E DE SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS POUR L AM RIQUE DU NORD Assujettie aux exigences conditions exclusions et limitations de la garantie limit e originale fournie avec les produits de Samsung Electronics SAMSUNG et les exigences conditions exclusions et limitations de la pr sente garantie SAMSUNG offrira en plus un service de r paration sous garantie aux tats Unis pour les produits achet s au Canada et un service de r paration sous garantie au Canada pour les produits achet s aux tats Unis pendant la p riode de garantie pr cis e l origine et pour l acheteur initial seulement Les r parations sous garantie d crites ci dessus doivent tre effectu es dans un centre de r paration agr SAMSUNG En plus de la pr sente garantie
142. e a l arri re de la t l commande tel qu illustr 2 Ins rez deux piles AAA dans la t l commande Assurez vous de faire correspondre les p les et des piles avec le sch ma situ dans le compartiment 3 Replacez le couvercle Retirez les piles et rangez les dans un endroit frais et sec si vous n utilisez pas la t l commande pendant une longue p riode Si le t l viseur est utilis de fa on normale les piles ont une dur e de vie d environ un an Si la t l commande ne fonctionne pas v rifiez ce qui suit Le t l viseur est il sous tension Les p les et des piles sont ils invers s Les piles sont elles plat Y a t il une panne de courant Le cordon d alimentation est il d branch Y a t il une lampe fluorescente ou un n on proximit il Affichage des menus Avant d utiliser le t l viseur suivez les tapes ci dessous pour apprendre comment naviguer dans les menus et s lectionner et ajuster diff rentes fonctions ENTER et touches de d placement Permet de d placer le curseur et de S lectionner l l ment en surbrillance VOL source CH Touche MENU Affiche le menu l cran principal y Touche RETURN Permet de retourner au menu pr c dent choisir un l ment EXIT Confirme le r glage Quitte le menu de l cran Q Utiliser l affichage l cran OSD On Screen Display La m thode d acc s varie en fonction du m
143. e file Then press the i aeie Yellow button Repeat the above operation to select multiple movie files The mark Y appears to the selected movie file 4 Press the TOOLS button The option menu changes according to the current status Q Play Current Group Using this menu you can only play movie files in the currently selected sorting group Q Deselect All When at least one file is selected You can deselect all files The Y mark indicating the corresponding file is selected is hidden Q Information The movie file information including the name the size the date modified and the path is displayed 3 Press the INFO button to viewing the information che Q Safe Remove You can remove the device safely from the TV El Playing a Movie File Playing a movie file 1 Press the Y button to select the File List Section g gt lt 00 00 01 00 05 30 7 2 Pressing the lt or button to select a movie file to be played 3 Press the gt Play ENTER C button The selected file is played The selected file is displayed at the top with its playing time The playing duration of a movie file may be displayed as 00 00 00 if its playing time information is not found at the start of the file You can watch exciting gaming multimedia files but the gaming function is not supported ABC avi S C Pause lt gt Jump fa Tools 2 Return English 50 Support
144. e genre Folder Sorts music files by the folder If there are many folders in USB the files are shown in order in each folder The music file in the Root folder is shown first and the others are shown in alphabetical order by name Preference wi wal KK Sorts music files by preference Favorite You can change the music files preferences Changing the Favorites Setting Select the desired music file in the File List Section then press the Green button repeatedly until the desired setting appears Up to 3 stars can be selected The stars are for grouping purposes only For example the 3 star setting does not have any priority over the one star setting English 46 ii Music List Option Menu 1 Press the MEDIA P button 2 Press the lt or gt button to select Music then press the ENTER C amp button Press the lt or button to select the desired Music file Selecting Multiple Music Files Press the or button to select the desired music file Then press the Yellow button Repeat the above operation to select multiple music files The mark Y appears to the selected music file 4 Press the TOOLS button The option menu changes according to the current status D Play Current Group Using this menu you can only play music files in the currently selected sorting group D Change Group Info When the Sort key is Mood You can change the mood information of music files The group information of the curr
145. e l ancienne Au moment de la mise niveau du micrologiciel les r glages vid o et audio que vous avez effectu s seront remplac s par les r glages par d faut d finis en usine Nous vous recommandons de prendre en note vos r glages afin de pouvoir les r tablir facilement apr s la mise niveau D placer C Entrer 9 Retour En ligne Mises jour du logiciel par Internet Configurez d abord votre r seau Pour conna tre le d tail de l utilisation de la fonction R glage du r seau consultez les instructions sous la rubrique Configuration du r seau voir pages 30 35 Si votre connexion Internet ne fonctionne pas correctement la connexion peu tre interrompue Veuillez t l charger de nouveau Si le probl me survient toujours t l chargez la mise niveau sur une cl USB et effectuez ensuite la mise niveau du micrologiciel Autre logiciel Backup Si un probl me survient avec le micrologiciel et que le fonctionnement du t l viseur est affect vous pouvez revenir la version ant rieure du logiciel Si le logiciel a t chang le logiciel existant est affich Vous pouvez remplacer le logiciel actuel par le logiciel en option l aide de la fonction Autre logiciel Guide de connexion HD Ce menu pr sente la m thode de branchement qui permet d obtenir la qualit optimale pour un t l viseur haute d finition Reportez vous cette rubrique lorsque vous branchez des appareils exter
146. e l galisateur aux valeurs par d faut Q SRS TruSurround HD Off On TruSurround HD est une technologie SRS brevet e qui r sout le probl me de la lecture de contenu multicanaux en 5 1 canaux lorsque la cha ne ne comprend que deux enceintes La technologie Trusurround offre une qualit audio virtuelle exceptionnelle avec n importe quelle cha ne deux enceintes y compris les haut parleurs internes d un t l viseur Elle est enti rement compatible avec tous les formats multicanaux A Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils Il est galement possible de r gler SRS TruSurround HD en choisissant Outils SRS TS HD Q Langue privil gi e canaux num riques seulement La t l diffusion num rique assure la transmission simultan e de plusieurs pistes de son par exemple la traduction simultan e de mission en langues trang res Vous pouvez couter une mission dans une langue autre que la Langue privil gi e en appuyant sur le bouton MTS de la t l commande Langue privil gi e n est disponible qu en mode num rique Seule une langue faisant partie des langues diffus es peut tre s lectionn e Q Son multi piste MTS canaux analogiques seulement Appuyez sur la touche MTS de la t l commande pour s lectionner Mono St r o ou SAP Mono Choisissez ce r glage pour les canaux diffus s en monophonie ou si la r ception d un signal st r o s av re difficile St r o Choisissez
147. e routeur reportez vous au mode d emploi du produit correspondant Le t l viseur peut tre connect directement au r seau LAN par l interm diaire d un routeur Il n est pas possible d utiliser un modem ADSL connexion manuelle parce qu il ne prend pas en charge le protocole DHCP II faut utiliser un modem ADSL connexion automatique Sess SE Fran ais 30 Connexion LAN pour un environnement adresse IP statique Les proc dures de configuration du r seau l aide d une adresse IP statique sont d crites ci dessous Vous devez entrer manuellement l adresse IP le masque de sous r seau la passerelle et le DNS fournis par votre fournisseur d acc s Internet 1 Reliez le port LAN au panneau arri re du t l viseur et le port LAN mural l aide du c ble LAN Vou Port LAN mural Panneau arri re du t l viseur Cable LAN s pouvez relier le LAN par un routeur Port LAN mural Routeur IP SS e hams Le C ble LAN C ble LAN Ss SSS B Les bornes le type de port et son emplacement de l appareil externe peuvent varier selon la marque Si vous utilisez une adresse IP statique le fournisseur d acc s Internet vous transmettra l adresse IP le masque de sous r seau la passerelle et le DNS II faut entrer ces valeurs pour achever la configuration du r seau Si elles ne sont pas connues informez vous aupr s de l administrateur du r seau
148. e set up or changed V Chip function is not available in HDMI Component or PC mode The default PIN number of a new TV set is 0 0 0 0 Allow all Press to unlock all TV ratings Block all Press to lock all TV ratings Change PIN The Change PIN screen will appear Choose any 4 digits for your PIN and enter them As soon as the 4 digits are entered the Confirm New PIN screen appears Re enter the same 4 digits When the Confirm screen disappears your PIN has been memorized If you forget the PIN press the remote control buttons in the following sequence which resets the pin to 0 0 0 0 POWER off MUTE 8 2 gt 4 POWER on English 25 V Chip Lock Off On You can block rated TV Programs TV Parental Guidelines You can block TV programs depending on their rating This function allows you to control what TV Parental Guidelines your children are watching TAG e TV Y Young children TV Y7 Children 7 and over TV G General audience TV PG Wy Alw AI Parental guidance TV 14 Viewers 14 and over TV MA Mature audience w BIB Block Al e ALL Lock all TV ratings FV Fantasy violence V Violence S Sexual situation L ps Adult Language D Sexually Suggestive Dialog mes amp The V Chip will automatically block certain categories that are more restrictive For example if you block TV Y category then TV Y7 will automatically be blocked Similarly if you block the TV G category then all t
149. e stock name Press the ENTER C amp button again to cancel the setting The mark will disappear To cancel all selections press the Green button Pressing the Red button toggles between NYSE and NASDAQ To finish the settings press the RETURN button No Favorite Stocks NASDAQ Reset Move C Select D Return English 60 il InfoLink Setup 1 Press the INFO L button on the remote control InfoLink s Setup 2 Press the lt or gt button to select Setup then press the ENTER C button 3 Press the A or Y button to select the desired option then press the ENTER C button To exit the Setup service press the RETURN button To exit the InfoLink service press the EXIT button Move CY Select 5 Return Auto Launch Determines whether to launch InfoLink automatically when the TV is turned on You can select either Off or On Display Time Determines the time to display the news service on the TV screen You can select 4 Hours 8 Hours 10 Hours or Always Font Size You can select letter size Standard or Large through InfoLink service Background Color You can select the Background Color of InfoLink service The color is applied to each service option and setup window InfoLink s Position You can set the position of each InfoLink service on the screen You can select from six preset InfoLink positions Position 1 Position 6 ALL THE MATERIALS AVAILABLE THROUGH INFOLINK INFOLINK CONTENT AR
150. e tri Appuyez sur la touche lt ou gt pour choisir un crit re de classement Appuyez sur la touche ou ENTER pour passer la section Liste des groupes Appuyez sur la touche gt Lecture Seuls les fichiers du groupe choisi sont lus Ou encore Choisissez une cl de tri Choisissez ensuite les fichiers du groupe d sir dans la section Liste des fichiers Pour passer au groupe pr c dent ou suivant appuyez sur la touche lt lt REW ou gt gt FF Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour choisir Lire groupe courant puis sur ENTERC Les fichiers film du groupe de classement y compris le fichier s lectionn sont lus Lecture des fichiers film s lectionn s Appuyez sur la touche W pour s lectionner la section Liste des fichiers Appuyez sur la touche lt ou gt pour choisir le fichier film d sir Appuyez sur la touche jaune Le symbole Y appara t gauche du fichier film s lectionn Pour d s lectionner tous les fichiers appuyez sur la touche TOOLS et choisissez D s lect tout R p tez la proc dure ci dessus pour s lectionner plusieurs fichiers film Appuyez sur la touche gt Lecture ENTER C4 Seul le fichier s lectionn est lu Fonction de lecture d un film en continu reprendre une lecture Si vous quittez un film en cours de lecture vous pouvez en poursuivre la lecture plus tard partir de l endroit o
151. ecting to a Cable Box that Descrambles All Channels 1 Find the cable that is connected to the ANT OUT terminal on your cable box This terminal might be labeled ANT OUT VHF OUT or simply OUT ANTIN ANTOUT m S ANT IN 2 Connect the other end of this cable to the ANT IN terminal on the back of the TV Connecting to a Cable Box that Descrambles Some Channels If your cable box descrambles only some channels such as premium channels follow the instructions below You will need a two way splitter an RF A B switch and four lengths of RF cable These items are available at most electronics stores Incoming cable Splitt al RF AIB Switch Cable Box 1 Find and disconnect the cable that is connected to the ANT IN terminal on your cable box This terminal might be labeled ANT IN VHF IN or simply IN Connect this cable to a two way splitter Connect an RF cable between the OUTPUT terminal on the splitter and the IN terminal on the cable box Connect an RF cable between the ANT OUT terminal on the cable box and the B IN terminal on the RF A B switch Connect another cable between the other OUT terminal on the splitter and the A IN terminal on the RF A B switch Connect the last RF cable between the OUT terminal on the RF A B switch and the ANT IN terminal on the rear of the TV After you have made this connection set the A B switch to the
152. ed Subtitle Formats Name File extension Format MPEG 4 time based text ttxt XML SAMI Smi HTML SubRip srt string based SubViewer sub string based Micro DVD Sub or txt string based Supported Movie Formats File extension Container Video Decoder Audio codec Resolution Divx 3 11 4 x 5 1 6 0 720x576 XviD MP3 1920x1080 avi AVI H 264 BP MP HP Pei 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP ASP ADPCM 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 Divx 3 11 4 x 5 1 6 0 720x576 XviD MP3 1920x1080 mkv MKV H 264 BP MP HP Pei 1920x1080 MPEG4 SP ASP ADPCM 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 Divx 3 11 4 x 5 1 6 0 720x576 XviD MES 1920x1080 asf ASF H 264 BP MP HP LPCM 1920x1080 ADPCM MPEG4 SP ASP WMA 1920x1080 Motion JPEG 800x600 wmv ASF VC1 WMA 1920x1080 H 264 BP MP HP 1920x1080 MP4 MP3 mp4 SMP4 MPEG4 SP ASP ADPCM 1920x1080 XVID AAG 1920x1080 H 264 BP MP HP 1920x1080 3gp 3GPP AEM MPEG4 SP ASP 1920x1080 VRO MPEG2 AC3 1920x1080 Vro VOB MPEG MPEG1 LPCM 1920x1080 MPEG1 AC3 1920x1080 mpg PS MPEG mpeg MPEG2 PCM 1920x1080 MPEG2 1920x1080 ts AAC tp TS H 264 MP3 1920x1080 trp vc 1920x1080 English 51 Video Play Control Buttons Button Operations ENTERC Play Pause the movie file gt Play the movie f
153. ed web service To exit the News service press the Blue button To exit the InfoLink service press the EXIT button a Using the Stock Service 1 2 3 4 Favorite Stocks The Favorite stock information is displayed You can set up the Favorite Stocks by pressing the Yellow button Press the INFO L button on the remote control Press the lt or gt button to move to the Stocks service and press the ENTER C4 button Press the Red button while using the service to change the Stocks service option Press A or button and select Stocks service option then press the ENTER C button Market Summary Dow Jones NASDAQ and S amp P 500 are toggled and the entire index amount of up or down and are displayed Stocks amp News The Favorite stock information and Dow Jones NASDAQ and S amp P 500 index and Financial news are displayed Stock quotes delayed at least 15 minutes To exit the Stocks service press the Blue button To exit the InfoLink service press the EXIT button Setting Favorite Stocks Items f 4 Press the Yellow button when Favorite Stocks or Stocks amp News is selected The Set Favorite Stocks screen appears Press lt or gt button to move to the Category Press the A or Y button to select a Category Press the ENTER C button Press the A or Y button to select a stock item and press the ENTER L button The selected stock is set as a Favorite Stock The Y mark will appear to the left of th
154. eight Without Stand 31 4 lbs 15 6 Kg With Stand 42 8 lbs 19 4 Kg Environmental Considerations Operating Temperature Operating Humidity Storage Temperature Storage Humidity Stand Swivel Left Right 10 C to 40 C 50 F to 104 F 10 to 80 non condensing 20 C to 45 C 4 F to 113 F 5 to 95 non condensing 20 20 English 69 Model Name LN46B640 Screen Size 46 inches Diagonal 46 0 inches measured diagonally PC Resolution Optimum 1920 x 1080 60 Hz Sound Output 10W x2 Dimensions WxDxH Body 46 1 x 3 1 x 28 0 inch 1172 0 x 79 3 x 711 5 mm With stand 46 1 x 10 9 x 30 4 inch 1172 0 x 277 0 x 771 4 mm Weight Without Stand 43 4 lbs 19 7 Kg With Stand 53 8 lbs 24 4 Kg Environmental Considerations Operating Temperature Operating Humidity 10 C to 40 C 50 F to 104 F 10 to 80 non condensing Storage Temperature 20 C to 45 C 4 F to 113 F Storage Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Stand Swivel Left Right 20 20 Model Name LN55B640 Screen Size 55 inches Diagonal 54 7 inches measured diagonally PC Resolution Optimum 1920 x 1080 60 Hz Sound Output 15W x2 Dimensions WxDxH Body 53 7 x 3 3 x 32 4 inch 1362 9 x 83 0 x 824 2 mm With stand 53 7 x 12 1 x 34 8 inch 1362 9 x 308 0 x 884 4 mm Weight Without Stand 65 2 Ibs 29 6 Kg With Stand 76 1 Ibs 34 5 Kg
155. ent file is updated and the file is moved to the new group To change the information of multiple files select files by pressing the Yellow button Q Deselect All When at least one file is selected You can deselect all files The Y mark indicating the corresponding file is selected is hidden Q Information The music file information including the name the size the date modified and the path is displayed You can view the music file information during Play Current Group using the same procedures ea Press the INFO button to viewing the information Coro F Las Q Safe Remove You can remove the device safely from the TV English 47 Playing Music Playing a music file 1 Press the Y button to select the File List Section gt 00 00 04 00 04 04 7 2 Press the lt or button to select a music file to be played 3 Press the gt Play ENTERCS amp button This menu only shows files with the MP3 file extension Files with other file extensions are not displayed even if they are saved on the same USB device The selected file is displayed at the top with its playing time To adjust the music volume press the volume button on the remote control Cafu ER io SP To mute the sound press the MUTE button on the remote control If the sound is odd when playing MP3 files adjust the Equalizer and SRS TruSurround HD in the Sound menu An over modulated MP3 file may cause a sound problem The playing du
156. enu s lectionn Em FR 1 Appuyez sur la touche MENU a 2 Le menu principal appara t l cran La partie gauche du menu comprend des ic nes Image 3 Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour s lectionner une ic ne RR Mode Standard Son Chaine Configuration Entr e Application Support technique Contre jour 7 Contraste 95 Luminosit 45 Nettet 50 Couleur 50 Teinte V R V50 R50 R glages avanc s Fran ais 5 4 Ensuite appuyez sur ENTER C pour acc der au sous menu de l ic ne Mode Standard 5 Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour s lectionner le sous menu de l ic ne Contre jour Gi Contraste 95 Luminosit 45 Nettet 50 Couleur 50 V50 R50 R glages avanc s Options d image 6 Appuyez sur la touche lt ou gt pour augmenter ou r duire la valeur d un l ment i particulier Le r glage du menu OSD varie en fonction du menu s lectionn Contre jour 7 v D pl 4b R glage C Intro D Retour Ic ne Aide 7 Appuyez sur ENTER C pour terminer la configuration Appuyer sur la touche EXIT pour quitter Fran ais 6 D Fonction Pr t l emploi Au moment de la mise sous tension initiale du t l viseur les param tres de base sont automatiquement r gl s D autres sont r gl s en cours d utilisation POWER 1 Appuyez sur la touche POWER de la t l commande Vous pouvez galement appuyer sur la touche
157. er des traces de Le bordures a gauche droite et au centre de l cran cause de la diff rence d mission de lumi re sur l cran La lecture d un DVD ou l utilisation d une console de jeu peut avoir un effet similaire sur l cran Les dommages qui pr c dent ne sont pas couverts par la garantie e L affichage d images fixes provenant de jeux vid o et d ordinateurs au del d une certaine p riode peut provoquer une r manence partielle Pour viter cela r duisez la luminosit et le contraste durant l affichage d images fixes 2009 Samsung Electronics Co Ltd Tous droits r serv s TABLE DES MATI RES CONFIGURATION DE VOTRE T L VISEUR m Liste des caract ristiques mACcessoires 111 111 10 m Affichage du panneau de configuration m Affichage de la t lecommande m Insertion des piles dans la t l commande m Affichage des menus m Fonction Pr t l emploi CONNEXIONS m Connexion d antennes VHF et UHF ou cece eeeeseeeeeseetenee 8 m Connexion pour la cablodiffusion m Affichage du panneau de branchement ml 0 CHA NE 3 m Menu des canaux a m Gestion des canaux X IMAGE m Configuration du menu Image 15 m Visionnement Image sur Image m Utilisation du t l viseur comme cran PC m Configuration du t l viseur avec un PC 22 Mi Configuration Gu MEN SON es 23 CONFIGURATION m Configuration du menu de config
158. erial by anyone who conveys the material or modified versions of it with contractual assumptions of liability to the recipient for any liability that these contractual assumptions directly impose on those licensors and authors All other non permissive additional terms are considered further restrictions within the meaning of section 10 If the Program as you received it or any part of it contains a notice stating that it is governed by this License along with a term that is a further restriction you may remove that term If a license document contains a further restriction but permits relicensing or conveying under this License you may add to a covered work material governed by the terms of that license document provided that the further restriction does not survive such relicensing or conveying If you add terms to a covered work in accord with this section you must place in the relevant source files a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms Additional terms permissive or non permissive may be stated in the form of a separately written license or stated as exceptions the above requirements apply either way Termination You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License including any p
159. ernet ou un r seau il se peut que le t l viseur ne puisse pas se connecter Internet Le cas ch ant vous devez entrer votre code d utilisateur ou mot de passe pour la connexion Internet l aide d un dispositif de partage de la connexion Internet routeur La connexion Internet peut chouer en raison d un probl me avec le parefeu Le cas ch ant communiquez avec votre fournisseur Internet Si vous tes incapable de vous connecter Internet apr s avoir suivi toutes les proc dures donn es par votre fournisseur Internet veuillez communiquer avec un centre de service Samsung Electronics au 1 800 SAMSUNG Configuration du r seau cabl R glage autom Si vous branchez le cable LAN et qu il est prend en charge le protocole DHCP les param tres Configuration du r seau cabl IP sont configur s automatiquement 1 R glez l option Type de r seau C ble None 2 S lectionnez Configuration du r seau c bl 3 R glez l option R glage pr Internet R glage autom Le protocole Internet est r gl automatiquement 4 S lectionnez Test du r seau pour v rifier la connectivit du r seau CE Etre SEE Configuration du r seau c bl R glage manuel Pour brancher le t l viseur au c ble LAN l aide d une adresse IP statique il faut configurer le Configuration du r s protocole Internet 1 R glez l option Type de r seau C ble Maia 2 S lectionnez Configuration du r seau c bl Me es
160. errer les vis 2 Branchez l adaptateur la borne ANT IN l arri re du t l viseur Antennes avec c ble rond de 75 Q Branchez le c ble de l antenne la borne ANT IN l arri re du t l viseur Antennes VHF et UHF s par es Si vous disposez de deux antennes s par es pour votre t l viseur une VHF et une UHF IA vous devez combiner leurs signaux avant de les brancher au t l viseur Cette proc dure exige un multiplexeur adaptateur disponible dans la plupart des magasins d lectronique pae ka 1 Branchez les deux c bles des antennes au multiplexeur O _ 2 Branchez le multiplexeur la prise ANT IN situ e au bas du panneau arri re Fran ais 8 Connexion pour la cablodiffusion Pour effectuer le branchement du service de c blodiffusion proc dez comme suit ANT IN C ble sans c blos lecteur Branchez le c ble d arriv e la borne ANT IN l arri re du t l viseur Comme ce t l viseur est dot d un convertisseur il est inutile d ajouter un c blos lecteur pour couter les canaux d brouill s Branchement un c blos lecteur servant d brouiller tous les canaux 1 Rep rez le c ble connect la prise ANT OUT du cablos lecteur Cette prise peut porter la mention ANT OUT VHF OUT ou simplement OUT ANTIN ANTOUT m S 2 Branchez l autre extr mit de ce C ble la prise ANT IN situ e l arri re de la
161. es affich s l cran Sous titres Off On Vous pouvez activer ou d sactiver la fonction des sous titres Si la fonction des sous titres n est pas disponible il n y a pas d affichage l cran Appuyez sur la touche CC de la t l commande pour r gler la fonction des sous titres marche ou arr t L option Sous titres ne fonctionne pas dans les modes Composante HDMI ou PC Mode ss titres cod s Vous pouvez s lectionner le mode de sous titrage souhait L option de sous titrage disponible d pend de l mission diffus e e Par d faut CC1 CC4 Texte1 Texte4 canaux analogiques seulement La fonction de sous titrage analogique fonctionne en mode canaux analogiques ou lorsqu un signal est fourni au t l viseur partir d un appareil externe Selon le signal metteur la fonction des sous titres analogiques peut fonctionner sur les canaux num riques e Par d faut Service1 Service6 CC1 CC4 Texte1 Texte4 canaux num riques seulement La fonction des sous titres num riques fonctionne seulement sur les canaux num riques Service1 6 en mode Sous titres num riques ne sont pas toujours disponibles selon le syst me de diffusion utilis Options de sous titrage num rique canaux num riques seulement e Format Cette option permet de choisir entre Par d faut Petit Standard et Grand La couleur par d faut est Standard e Style des polices Cette option comprend Par d faut Style 0 Style 7 Vous pou
162. ese conditions a The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it and giving a relevant date b The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7 This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to keep intact all notices c You must license the entire work as a whole under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy This License will therefore apply along with any applicable section 7 additional terms to the whole of the work and all its parts regardless of how they are packaged This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it d If the work has interactive user interfaces each must display Appropriate Legal Notices however if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices your work need not make them do so A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium is called an aggregate if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation s users beyond what the individual works permit Inclusion
163. et When the security setting of AP that supports WPS is NONE CASE you can select PBC PIN None Security None Security is capable of connecting to AP SEEM directly without using WPS function Process of PBC PIN is same as above Refer to if Security Key is already set 2 Try again if connecting operation doesn t work Move Enter D Return English 34 Ad hoc You can connect to a mobile device without an access point through the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter by using a peer to peer network How to connect to new Ad hoc 1 Choose Select a network then a device list is displayed 2 While in the device list press the Blue button on the remote or select Ad hoc The message The existing network system may have limited The existing network system may have limited functionality Do you want to change the network connection is fungtionality DO vou fo chinge tenets connection displayed 3 Input the generated Network Name SSID and Security Key into the device you want to connect How to connect an existing Ad hoc device 1 Choose Select a network the device list is displayed 2 Select the device you want in the Device list 3 If security key was applied input the security key again If network doesn t operate normally please check the Network Name SSID and Security Key again If the Security Key is incorrect it may be the reason for the malfunction Wireless Network Setup Auto Setup I
164. et 18 seront automatiquement bloqu es Fran ais canadien RS 2 282 G Tout public 8 ans Emissions convenant g n ralement aux enfants de 8 ans et plus sans surveillance 13 ans missions pouvant ne pas convenir aux enfants de moins de 13 ans 16 ans Emissions ne convenant pas aux enfants de moins de 16 ans 18 ans missions r serv es aux adultes La fonction V Chip bloque automatiquement toutes les cat gories qui sont plus restrictives Par exemple si vous bloquez la cat gorie 8 ans les cat gories 13 ans 16 ans et 18 ans seront automatiquement bloqu es Fran ais 26 Cat g am ricaine t l chargeable Nombre de tous les titres de classification Titre de Il est possible d utiliser de l information sur le contr le parental tout en regardant des canaux classification Nombre de titres de classification actuels num riques Si l information n est pas t l charg e partir de la station de radiodiffusion le menu Cat g am ricaine t l chargeable Cat g am ricaine t l chargeable est d sactiv A amp L information sur le contr le parental est t l charg e automatiquement lorsqu on regarde T des canaux num riques Cela peut prendre plusieurs secondes Py Le menu Cat g am ricaine t l chargeable est disponible pour utilisation apr s VH C t l chargement de l information partir de la station de radiodiffusion Toutefois selon Si aa l informat
165. et de lire un diaporama cr l aide des fichiers photo du groupe de classement choisi Q Mod info groupe lorsque la cl de tri est Couleur Vous pouvez modifier l information de couleur d un fichier photo ou d un groupe de fichiers pour les transf rer d un groupe de couleur un autre La couleur r elle de la photo n est pas modifi e L information de groupe du fichier actuel est mise jour et les photos sont d plac es dans le nouveau groupe de couleur Pour modifier l information de plusieurs fichiers s lectionnez les fichiers d sir s l aide de la touche jaune Q D s lect tout quand au moins un fichier est s lectionn Vous pouvez d s lectionner tous les fichiers Le symbole Y indiquant que le fichier correspondant est s lectionn dispara t Q Information L information du fichier photo notamment le nom la taille la r solution la date de modification et le chemin est affich e Vous pouvez afficher l information des fichiers photo pendant un diaporama l aide de la m me proc dure CE Appuyez sur la touche INFO pour afficher l information C no Lis Q Supp s curit ll est possible de retirer le dispositif du t l viseur de fa on s re Fran ais 42 a Lecture d une photo ou d un diaporama Lecture d un diaporama 1 2 3 B B B aS Lecture du groupe courant 1 1 oN Appuyez sur la touche W pour s lectionner la sectio
166. et l arri re du support lors de l assemblage Pour veiller ce que le t l viseur soit install sur le support au niveau appropri n exercez pas de pression excessive sur les c t s sup rieurs droit et gauche du t l viseur 2 Vissez les vis la position puis vissez les vis la position Placez l appareil la verticale et vissez les vis Si vous vissez les vis lorsque le t l viseur est en position horizontale il pourrait pencher vers un c t il Retrait du support La couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du mod le il Installation du support La couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du mod le 1 Pr r glage Placez le guide de support et le collet sur le support et fixez les a l aide des vis Applicables aux mod les LN32B650 seulement 1 Retirez les vis l arri re du t l viseur 2 S parez le support du t l viseur Deux personnes ou plus devraient porter le t l viseur 3 Placez le couvercle sur l orifice inf rieur Fran ais 63 Assemblage des c bles Faites passer les c bles dans le c ble porte fil pour ne pas les voir au travers du support transparent La couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du mod le Sp cifications de l ensemble d installation murale VESA Installez votre support mural sur un mur solide et perpendiculaire au planche
167. et les minutes l aide des touches num riques de la t l commande La r servation d une mission s affiche dans le menu Enregistrement par minuterie T l horaire num rique et r servation d mission Lorsqu un canal num rique est s lectionn et que vous appuyez sur la touche P le t l horaire du canal s affiche Il est possible de r server une mission en suivant les proc dures ci dessus Modifier le nom du canal canaux analogiques seulement Les canaux peuvent tre marqu s de sorte que leur indicatif d appel s affiche chaque fois que le canal est s lectionn Les noms des canaux num riques sont automatiquement assign s et ne peuvent tre marqu s Choisir tout D s lect tout e Choisir tout Vous pouvez s lectionner tous les canaux dans la liste des canaux e D s lect tout Vous pouvez d s lectionner tous les canaux s lectionn s Seule l option D s lect tout peut tre choisie lorsqu il y a un canal choisi Prog auto Pour conna tre les proc dures d taill es relatives l utilisation de Prog auto consultez les instructions sous la rubrique Menu des canaux voir page 13 Menu d options des listes de canaux sous Enregistrement par minuterie ll est possible d afficher de modifier ou de supprimer une r servation Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS pour utiliser le menu d options Annuler horaires Information modification Information S lectionnez cette option pour modifier une r ser
168. evision can begin memorizing the available channels you must specify the type of signal source that is connected to the TV i e an Air or a Cable system A Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu You can also set the Antenna by BY Antenna selecting Tools Switch to Cable or Switch to Air spat Channel List Fine Tune Q Auto Program Air Air antenna signal Cable Cable antenna signal Auto Air and Cable antenna signals When selecting the Cable TV system Selects the cable system STD HRC and IRC identify various types of cable TV systems Contact your local cable company to identify the type of cable system that exists in your particular area At this point the signal source has been selected After all the available channels are stored it starts to remove scrambled channels Removing scrambled channel The Auto program menu then reappears If you want to stop Auto Programming press the ENTER C amp button The Stop Auto Program message will be displayed Select Yes by pressing the lt or gt button then press the ENTER button Q Clear Scrambled Channel digital channels only This function is used to filter out scrambled channels after Auto Program is completed This process may take up to 20 30 minutes To stop searching scrambled channels Press the ENTER C button to select Stop Press the lt button to select Yes then press the ENTER C button This function is only available in Cable mo
169. f its coverage prohibits the exercise of or is conditioned on the non exercise of one or more of the rights that are specifically granted under this License You may not convey a covered work if you are a party to an arrangement with a third party that is in the business of distributing software under which you make payment to the third party based on the extent of your activity of conveying the work and under which the third party grants to any of the parties who would receive the covered work from you a discriminatory patent license a in connection with copies of the covered work conveyed by you or copies made from those copies or b primarily for and in connection with specific products or compilations that contain the covered work unless you entered into that arrangement or that patent license was granted prior to 28 March 2007 Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law No Surrender of Others Freedom If conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not convey it at all For example if
170. f you want to connect AP AP should support DHCP Only devices which support Ad hoc mode can be connected without DHCP Internet Protocol Setup Auto Setup 1 Set Network Type to Wireless oe 2 Select Wireless Network Setup 3 Set Internet Protocol Setup to Auto Setup The Internet Protocol is set automatically 4 Select a network through Select a network 5 Select Network Test to check the network connectivity Wireless Network Setup Move Enter 5 Return Wireless Network Setup Manual Setup Wireless Network Setup 1 Set Network Type to Wireless internet Protocol Setup Manual Setup i Network Tes Select Wireless Network Setup etwork Test 2 Select a network 3 Set Internet Protocol Setup to Manual Setup IP Address 4 Setup IP Address Subnet Mask Gateway and DNS Server TEn Press the number buttons on the remote control when you set the Network manually a Select a network through Select a network P AT 6 Select Network Test to check the network connectivity a English 35 INPUT SUPPORT il Input Menu Q Source List Use to select TV or other external input sources such as DVD Blu ray players Cable Box Satellite receivers Set Top Box connected to the TV Use to select the input source of your choice Press the SOURCE button on the remote control to view an external signal source TV AV1 AV2 Componenti Component2 PC HDMI1 DVI HDMI2 HDMI3 HDMI4 USB Y
171. favori Choisissez le fichier film d sir dans la section Liste des fichiers et appuyez ensuite a r p tition sur la touche verte jusqu a l affichage du r glage d sir Jusqu 3 toiles peuvent tre s lectionn es Les toiles servent des fins de regroupement seulement Par exemple un m dia trois toiles n a pas priorit sur un m dia une toile Fran ais 49 il Options du menu Liste des films 1 Appuyez sur la touche MEDIA P 2 Appuyez sur la touche lt ou pour choisir Movie puis sur ENTER C 3 Appuyez sur la touche lt ou pour s lectionner le fichier film d sir S lection de plusieurs fichiers film a csuam Appuyez sur la touche lt ou pour choisir le fichier film d sir Appuyez Da ensuite sur la touche jaune R p tez la marche suivre ci dessus pour s lectionner plusieurs fichiers film Le symbole w s affiche c t du fichier film s lectionn 4 Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS Les options de menu varient selon l tat actuel Q Lire groupe courant Ce menu ne permet de que lire les fichiers film du groupe de classement choisi Q D s lect tout quand au moins un fichier est s lectionn Vous pouvez d s lectionner tous les fichiers Le symbole Y indiquant que le fichier correspondant est s lectionn dispara t Q Information L information du fichier film notamment le nom la taille la date de modification et le chemin d acc s est affich e
172. fied in performing those activities but which are not part of the work For example Corresponding Source includes interface definition files associated with source files for the work and the source code for shared libraries and dynamically linked subprograms that the work is specifically designed to require such as by intimate data communication or control flow between those subprograms and other parts of the work The Corresponding Source need not include anything that users can regenerate automatically from other parts of the Corresponding Source The Corresponding Source for a work in source code form is that same work Basic Permissions All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output given its content constitutes a covered work This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent as provided by copyright law You may make run and propagate covered works that you do not convey without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you or provide you with facilities for running those works provided that you comply with the ter
173. harger le fichier d enregistrement VOD Lancez l enregistrement VOD l aide de Media Play pour compl ter l enregistrement Pour de plus amples renseignements sur la vid o sur demande DivX visitez www DivX com Obtenir code d sact vid o s dem DivX Si le DivX VOD n est pas enregistr le code de d sactivation de l enregistrement est affich Si vous ex cutez cette fonction quand le DivX VOD est enregistr l enregistrement courant DivX VOD est d sactiv Tps fct cran veille 4h 8h 10h Choisir cette option pour fixer le temps d attente avant que l cran de veille ne soit lanc Information S lectionner cette option pour visualiser l information sur le dispositif branch Supp s curit ll est possible de retirer le dispositif du t l viseur de fa on s re Fran ais 54 ANYNET il Branchement d appareils Anynett Qu est ce qu Anynet Anynett est une fonction qui permet de contr ler l aide de la t l commande de votre t l viseur Samsung tous vos appareils Samsung prenant en charge Anynet Le syst me Anynet peut tre utilis uniquement avec les appareils Samsung dot s de la fonction Anynett Afin de v rifier si votre appareil Samsung est dot de cette fonction v rifiez s il arbore le logo Anynet Branchement au t l viseur TV Appareil 1 Anynett Appareil 2 Anynett Appareil 3 Anynet Appareil 4 Anynett JC JE J HDMI OUT
174. he lt ou pour choisir une ic ne Photo Music Movie Setup puis sur ENTERC Pour quitter le mode Media Play appuyez sur la touche MEDIA P de la t l commande Fran ais 39 Retrait s r d un dispositif de m moire USB ll est possible de retirer le dispositif du t l viseur de fa on s re z 1 Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS pendant l affichage de la liste des fichiers Media nd En Play ou pendant la lecture d un diaporama de musique ou d un film 2 Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour choisir Supp s curit puis sur ENTER CS 3 Retirez le dispositif USB du t l viseur Affichage l cran Couleur Dossier P _ sexion Liste des cl s de tri 2 Section Liste des groupes a 4 fe CRIE Section Liste des fichiers SE es a c a P al Bd 1231 jpg 1236 jpg 1237ip9 i 1235 jpg Passez la section Liste des cl s de tri Liste de groupe ou Liste des fichiers l aide des fl ches verticales Apr s avoir choisi une section appuyez sur la touche lt ou pour choisir un l ment Cl de tri actuelle Ce champ indique le crit re de classement actuel des fichiers Appuyez sur la touche lt ou gt pour modifier le crit re de classement des fichiers Affichage des groupes Affiche les groupes d taill s ou les fichiers selon la cl de tri choisie Le groupe de classement comprenant le fichier s lectionn est mis en surbrillance Fichier actuellement s lectionn Le fich
175. he GNU General Public License you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation If the Program specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of the GNU General Public License can be used that proxy s public statement of acceptance of a version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the Program Later license versions may give you additional or different permissions However no additional obligations are imposed on any author or copyright holder as a result of your choosing to follow a later version Disclaimer of Warranty THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING REPAIR OR CORRECTION Limitation of Liability IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MODIFIES AND OR CONVEYS THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES INCLUDING ANY GENERAL SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE
176. he categories in the young adult group will be blocked TV G TV PG TV 14 and TV MA The sub ratings D L S V work together similarly The V chip will automatically block certain categories that are More restrictive For example if you block L sub rating in TV PG then the L sub ratings in TV 14 and TV MA will automatically be blocked Move Enter 5 Retum MPAA Rating You can block movies depending on their MPAA rating The Motion Picture Association of MPAA Rating America MPAA has implemented a rating system that provides parents or guardians with advance information on which films are appropriate for children Alow All NR Not rated The V Chip will automatically block any category that is More restrictive For example if you block the PG 13 category then R NC 17 and X will automatically be blocked also e G General audience no restrictions TT e PG Parental guidance suggested e PG 13 Parents strongly cautioned e R Restricted Children under 17 should be accompanied by an adult e NC 17 No children under age 17 Move C Enter 5 Retum e X Adults only e 4 Canadian English C Programming intended for children under age 8 C8 Programming generally considered acceptable for children 8 years and over to watch on their own G General programming suitable for all audiences PG Parental Guidance 14 Programming contains themes or content which may not be suitable for vie
177. hen press the ENTER button Press the lt or gt button to select a service Weather News Stocks or Setup and press the ENTER C4 button Press the INFO L button on the remote control to display the InfoLink menu ia Using the Weather Service 1 Press the INFO L button on the remote control 2 Press the lt or gt button to move to the Weather service and press the ENTER button Set up the Region 3 Press Yellow button Input the postal zip code of the region by pressing the number buttons on the remote then pres s the ENTER C button You can check the weather of the selected region Set up Weather Option 4 Press the Red button while using the service to change the Weather service option 5 Press A or Y button and select Weather option To exit the Weather service press the Blue button To exit the InfoLink service press the EXIT button English 59 il Using the News Service 2 1 2 Z The news provider may be changed in the future Press the INFO L button on the remote control Press the lt or button to move to the News service and press the ENTER C4 button Press the ENTER C4 button to view the detailed article Press the A or Y button to view the previous or next article Press the Red button while using the service to change the News service Option Press A or button and select News service option The News service option changes depending on the provid
178. ic file ENTER C Pressing the ENTER C button during play pauses the play Pressing the ENTER C button during pause resumes the play P O Play or pause the Slide Show music or movie RETURN Return to the previous menu TOOLS Run various functions from the Photo Music and Movie menus 0 Stop the current slide show Music or Movie file aa gt gt Jump to previous group Jump to next group INFO Show file information MEDIA P Exit Media Play mode V CHA EXIT TV Stop Media Play mode and Returns to TV mode D Media Play Function This function enables you to view and listen to photo music and or movie files saved on a USB Mass Storage Class MSC device Entering the Media Play USB Menu 1 Press the MENU button Press the A or Y button to select Application then press the ENTER 4 button g lt 4 2 Press the A or Y button to select Media Play USB then press the ENTER CS button iq A F The Media Play USB menu is displayed on R hoto usic lovie etup SUM Device 9 Return Press the MEDIA P button on the remote control to display the Media Play T menu i GOOG 3 4 Press the SOURCE button on the remote control to view the source list Then Press the A or Y button to select USB MUTE Press the Red button then press the A or Y button to select the USB Memory Press the ENTER C button This function differs depending on the USB Memory Device The se
179. icense for product features or functions that do not conform to the ISO IEC 11172 3 or ISO IEC 13818 3 e SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS NORTH AMERICAN LIMITED WARRANTY STATEMENT Subject to the requirements conditions exclusions and limitations of the original Limited Warranty supplied with Samsung Electronics SAMSUNG products and the requirements conditions exclusions and limitations contained herein SAMSUNG will additionally provide Warranty Repair Service in the United States on SAMSUNG products purchased in Canada and in Canada on SAMSUNG products purchased in the United States for the warranty period originally specified and to the Original Purchaser only The above described warranty repairs must be performed by a SAMSUNG Authorized Service Center Along with this Statement the Original Limited Warranty Statement and a dated Bill of Sale as Proof of Purchase must be presented to the Service Center Transportation to and from the Service Center is the responsibility of the purchaser Conditions covered are limited only to manufacturing defects in material or workmanship and only those encountered in normal use of the product Excluded but not limited to are any originally specified provisions for in home or on site services minimum or maximum repair times exchanges or replacements accessories options upgrades or consumables For the location of a SAMSUNG Authorized Service Center please call toll free In the United States 1 800 SAMSUNG 1 8
180. ier s lectionn est le fichier que vous commandez Les fichiers photo et film s affichent sous forme de vignettes Dispositif actuel Affiche le nom du dispositif s lectionn Appuyez sur la touche rouge pour choisir un dispositif e Touche rouge Appareil S lectionne un dispositif branch l ments d aide e Touche verte R gl fav Modifie le r glage favori du fichier s lectionn Appuyez sur cette touche r p tition jusqu ce que la valeur d sir e s affiche e Touche jaune Choisir Choisit un fichier dans la liste Les fichiers s lectionn s sont marqu s du symbole VY Appuyez une fois de plus sur la touche jaune pour annuler votre choix e TOOLS Outils Affiche les options de menu les options de menu varient selon l tat actuel Information sur la s lection d l ments Affiche le nombre de fichiers s lectionn s l aide de la touche jaune Fran ais 40 a Classement de la liste des photos ll est possible de classer les photos de la liste selon un crit re particulier 1 Appuyez sur la touche MEDIA P 2 Appuyez sur la touche lt ou pour choisir Photo puis sur ENTER C 3 Appuyez sur la touche A pour passer la section Cl de tri 4 Appuyez sur la touche lt ou gt pour choisir un crit re de classement Aff de base P date Couleur Dossier P pr f Les photos sont class es selon le nouveau crit re 5 Appuyez sur la touche Y pour passer la se
181. ile nl Pause the movie file TOOLS Run various functions from the Movie menus E Exit play mode and return to the movie list lt gt Skip forwards or backwards through the movie file A Y Move to the first last of the file gt gt Play the file at double speed This function may not be supported depending on the movie file Playing the movie group 1 2 3 4 Press the A button to move to the Sort key Section Press the lt or button to select a sorting standard Press the Y or ENTER button to move to the Group List Section Press the gt Play button Only the files of the selected group will start playing Alternatively Select a Sort key and then in the File List Section select the files contained in the desired group To move to the previous next group press the lt lt REW or gt gt FF button Press the TOOLS button Press the A or Y button to select Play Current Group then press the ENTERC button The movie files in the sorting group including the selected file are played Playing the selected movie files 1 2 3 Press the Y button to select the File List Section Press the lt or gt button to select the desired movie file Press the Yellow button The Y mark appears to the left of the selected movie file To deselect all selected files press the TOOLS button and select Deselect All Repeat the above operation to select multiple movie files
182. ing to view mode is complete You cannot use the play function when Plug amp Play is in progress The connected device is not displayed Check whether or not the device supports Anynett functions Check whether or not the HDMI 1 3 cable is properly connected Check whether Anynet HDMI CEC is set to On in the Anynet setup menu Search Anynett devices again You can connect an Anynet device using the HDMI 1 3 cable only Some HDMI cables may not support Anynet functions If it is terminated by an abnormal situation such as disconnecting the HDMI cable or power cord or a power failure please repeat the device scan The TV program cannot be recorded Check whether the antenna jack on the recording device is properly connected The TV sound is not output through the receiver Connect the optical cable between TV and the receiver English 58 InfoLink il Using InfoLink You can view news stock market and weather information services using SAMSUNG s InfoLink service For more information on how to configure your network refer to Setting the Network eee see pages 30 35 Information provided by USA TODAY via InfoLink is for the United States only Information for other countries is not provided Activating InfoLink 1 Press the MENU button to display the menu Press the A or Y button to select Application then press the ENTER C button 2 Press the A or Y button to select InfoLink t
183. ion du r seau Q Type de r seau Choisissez Cable ou Sans fil comme mode de connexion au r seau Le menu est activ uniquement si l adaptateur LAN sans fil Samsung est branch Type de r seau Cable Connexion au r seau l aide d un cable R glage du r seau V Chip Sous titres M lodie Moyen Sans fil Economiseur nergie Off Connexion au r seau sans fil o S ES rj a E 8 Q R glage du r seau Configuration du r seau c bl lorsque l option Type de r seau est r gl e a Cable V rifiez si le cable LAN est branch e R glage pr Internet R glage autom R glage manuel e Test du r seau Il est possible de tester ou de confirmer l tat de la connexion r seau apr s avoir configur le r seau Impossible de se connecter un r seau cabl Si votre fournisseur Internet a enregistr l adresse MAC de l appareil utilis pour vous connecter Internet pour la premi re fois et proc de l authentification de l adresse MAC chaque fois que vous vous connectez Internet il se peut que votre t l viseur ne puisse pas se connecter Internet puisque son adresse MAC est diff rente de celle de l appareil ordinateur Le cas ch ant demandez votre fournisseur Internet la proc dure suivre pour connecter d autres appareils par exemple le t l viseur Internet Si votre fournisseur Internet vous demande un mot de passe et un code d utilisateur pour vous connecter Int
184. ion provenant de la station il est possible qu on ne puisse pas l utiliser Les niveaux de contr le parental diff rent selon la station de radiodiffusion Le nom du menu par d faut et Downloadable US rating changent en fonction des donn es t l charg es M me si vous r glez l affichage l cran dans la langue souhait e le menu Cat g am ricaine t l chargeable s affiche en anglais seulement B 2 D pl C Intro Retour La classification bloque automatiquement certaines cat gories plus restrictives Les cat gories par exemple Humor Level etc et les niveaux de classification par exemple DH MH H etc peuvent diff rer selon la station de t l diffusion Comment r initialiser le t l viseur lorsque la fonction V Chip bloque un canal solution d urgence Si un canal acc s restreint est syntonis la fonction V Chip le bloque L cran se vide et le Classif obtenue MPAA X Anglais canadien C8 LL VH message suivant s affiche Ce canal est bloque en mode puce V Veuillez entrer un 1 Entrez votre NIP Appuyez ensuite sur les touches A ou Y pour d sactiver NIP pour d bloquer temporairement le blocage V Chip E F Si vous avez oubli votre code NIP appuyez sur les touches de la t l commande dans l ordre suivant pour r tablir le code 0 0 0 0 POWER Arr t MUTE 8 2 4 POWER Marche Bi Chang 9 9 Entrez NIP QO Sous titres Messag
185. ions m Dimensions Q License SRS C TruSurround HD SRS and c symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs Inc TruSurround HD technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs Inc CX DOLBY Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories Dolby and the double D symbol are DIGITAL trademarks of Dolby Laboratories DivX Certified to play DivX video including premium content Q Symbol A 2 Press Note al One Touch Button TOOL Button English 1 SETTING UP YOUR TV To use your TV you first have to set it up to suit your environment Figures and illustrations in this User Manual are provided for reference only and may differ from actual product appearance Product design and specifications may be changed without notice in order to enhance product performance al List of Features Adjustable picture settings that can be stored in the TV s memory Automatic timer to turn the TV on and off A special sleep timer Excellent Digital Interface amp Networking With a built in HD digital tuner nonsubscription HD broadcasts can be viewed with no Cable Box Satellite receiver Set Top Box needed HDMI DVI connection of your PC to this TV Excellent Picture Quality SRS TruSurround HD provides a virtual surround system Media Play Allows you to play music files pictures and movies saved on a USB Accessories Remote Control BN59 00853A Power
186. is infringed by making using selling offering for sale or importing the Program or any portion of it Patents A contributor is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based The work thus licensed is called the contributor s contributor version A contributor s essential patent claims are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor whether already acquired or hereafter acquired that would be infringed by some manner permitted by this License of making using or selling its contributor version but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version For purposes of this definition control includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License 12 13 14 15 16 Each contributor grants you a non exclusive worldwide royalty free patent license under the contributor s essential patent claims to make use sell offer for sale import and otherwise run modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version In the following three paragraphs a patent license is any express agreement or commitment however denominated not to enforce a patent such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement To grant such a patent license to a party means
187. issions All rights granted under this License are granted for the term of copyright on the Program and are irrevocable provided the stated conditions are met This License explicitly affirms your unlimited permission to run the unmodified Program The output from running a covered work is covered by this License only if the output given its content constitutes a covered work This License acknowledges your rights of fair use or other equivalent as provided by copyright law You may make run and propagate covered works that you do not convey without conditions so long as your license otherwise remains in force You may convey covered works to others for the sole purpose of having them make modifications exclusively for you or provide you with facilities for running those works provided that you comply with the terms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf under your direction and control on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below Sublicensing is not allowed section 10 makes it unnecessary Protecting Users Legal Rights From Anti Circumvention Law No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any appli
188. ite AUDIO OUT R AUDIO L Baissez le volume du t l viseur et r glez le volume a l aide de la commande de volume de l amplificateur LAN Branchez un cable LAN a ce port pour tablir une connexion au r seau Panneau lat ral Les prises du panneau lat ral du t l viseur sont pratiques pour les appareils souvent branch s et d branch s au t l viseur comme les cam scopes Z asn o O adh gt L ISN USB1 HDD USB2 Connecteur pour les mises niveau de logiciels Media Play etc Vous pouvez vous connecter sans fil au r seau Samsung l aide de l adaptateur LAN sans fil de Samsung vendu s par ment Pour les USB HDD utilisez le port USB1 HDD HDMIIN 4 brancher la prise HDMI d un appareil dot d une sortie HDMI AV IN 2 VIDEO R AUDIO L Entr es audio et vid o pour appareils externes comme un cam scope ou un magn toscope Fran ais 12 CHA NE Vous pouvez configurer divers r glages pour les cannaux du t l viseur gr ce aux fonctions telles que Prog auto Cha ne favorite et Puissance signal Menu des canaux Q Antenne Air c ble Avant que votre t l viseur ne puisse commencer m moriser les canaux disponibles vous devez sp cifier le type de la source de signal branch e au t l viseur c est dire une antenne ou le c ble
189. le du contenu ainsi que la gestion de la facturation et des r glements Le chargement peut prendre quelques secondes entre chaque photo ce moment l ic ne de chargement appara t l cran M me si plus de deux dispositifs PTP sont branch s vous ne pouvez en utiliser qu un seul la fois Si plusieurs dispositifs MSC sont branch s certains pourraient ne pas tre reconnus Les dispositifs USB tr s nergivores plus de 500 mA ou 5 V pourraient ne pas tre pris en charge En cas de surcharge le message d avertissement Fail add new device USB1 USB2 Power Overload s affiche pendant le branchement ou l utilisation d un appareil USB l appareil pourrait ne pas tre reconnu ou ne pas fonctionner correctement T ch E e z Cl USB Photo Music Movie Setup p Quitter Fran ais 38 Utilisation des touches de la t l commande dans le menu Media Play Touche Fonctions A a Permet de d placer le curseur et de choisir un l ment S lectionnez l l ment en surbrillance En mode de lecture d un diaporama d un film ou de musique ENTERC Appuyer sur la touche ENTER pendant la lecture la met en pause Appuyer sur la touche ENTERC amp pendant la pause reprend la lecture gt j n Lire ou mettre en pause le diaporama la musique ou le film RETURN Permet de retourner au menu pr c dent
190. lect the Antenna source to memorize is displayed We recommend setting the TV to Home Use mode for the best picture in your home environment Store Demo mode is only intended for use in retail environments If the unit is accidentally set to Store Demo mode and you want to return to Home Use Standard Press the volume button on the TV When the volume OSD is displayed press and hold the MENU button on the TV for 5 seconds 4 Press the A or Y button to memorize the channels of the selected connection Press the ENTER C amp button to select Start Air Air antenna signal Cable Cable antenna signal Auto Air and Cable antenna signals In Cable mode you can select the correct signal source among STD HRC and IRC by pressing the A VY lt or gt button then press the ENTER C amp button If you have Digital cable select the cable system signal source for both Analog and Digital Contact your local cable company to identify the type of cable system that exists in your particular area 5 Press the ENTER button to select Start The TV will begin memorizing all of the available channels To stop the search before it has finished press the ENTER C button with Stop selected After all the available channels are stored it starts to remove scrambled channels The Auto program menu then reappears Press the ENTER button when channel memorization is complete The message Set the Clock Mode is displayed 6 Press the ENTE
191. lected USB device name appears at the bottom left of the screen Press the lt or gt button to select an icon Photo Music Movie Setup then press the ENTER C4 button To exit Media Play mode press the MEDIA P button on the remote control English 39 Removing a USB Memory Device Safely You can remove the device safely from the TV Pes 5 1 Press the TOOLS button in the Media Play file list screen or while a Slide Show music or movie is being played 2 Press the A or Y button to select Safe Remove then press the ENTERC button 3 Remove the USB device from the TV Screen Display Folder Basic View Timeline Sort key List Section 1 Group List Section BALE File List Section 1231jP9 1232 jpg 1236 jpg 1237jP9 t 1235 jpg Move to either Sort key List Section Group List Section or File List Section using the Up and Down buttons After selecting a section press the lt or gt buttons to select an item Current Sort key This field shows the current standard for sorting files Press the lt or gt button to change the standard for sorting files View Groups Shows the detailed groups of the files sorted according to the selected Sort key The sort group where the currently selected file is contained is highlighted Currently selected file The selected file is the file you can now control Photo and movie files are displayed as thumbnail images Current Device Shows the cur
192. les cables pour composante sont branch s aux prises correspondantes Le mode Sous titres ne fonctionne pas Si vous utilisez un cablos lecteur ou un r cepteur satellite vous devez r glez le mode Sous titres sur le r cepteur et non sur le t l viseur Image embrouill e Le logiciel de votre cablos lecteur a besoin d une mise niveau Communiquez avec votre cablodistributeur Image embrouill e La raison peut tre une incompatibilit avec votre cablos lecteur Pour supprimer ce probl me branchez les cables pour composante Des barres horizontales clignotent scintillent ou tremblent sur l image Ajustez la fonction de r glage de base puis r glez la fonction de r glage fin Des barres verticales clignotent scintillent ou tremblent sur l image Ajustez la fonction de r glage de base puis r glez la fonction de r glage fin Frangais 62 Probl me L cran est noir et le t moin d alimentation clignote Solution possible Sur votre ordinateur v rifiez l alimentation le c ble de signal La t l vision est en mode gestion d nergie D placez la souris de l ordinateur ou appuyez sur une touche du clavier ll est possible que l image ne soit pas stable et qu elle donne l impression de vibrer lorsqu un ordinateur est connect l entr e RG Si le r glage est incorrect utilisez le programme utilitaire de votre ordinateur pour modifier les param tres d
193. lic and in some countries other activities as well To convey a work means any kind of propagation that enables other parties to make or receive copies Mere interaction with a user through a computer network with no transfer of a copy is not conveying An interactive user interface displays Appropriate Legal Notices to the extent that it includes a convenient and prominently visible feature that 1 displays an appropriate copyright notice and 2 tells the user that there is no warranty for the work except to the extent that warranties are provided that licensees may convey the work under this License and how to view a copy of this License If the interface presents a list of user commands or options such as a menu a prominent item in the list meets this criterion Source Code The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it Object code means any non source form of a work A Standard Interface means an interface that either is an official standard defined by a recognized standards body or in the case of interfaces specified for a particular programming language one that is widely used among developers working in that language The System Libraries of an executable work include anything other than the work as a whole that a is included in the normal form of packaging a Major Component but which is not part of that Major Component and b serves
194. lir la valeur RVB param tr e s lectionnez R gler Rouge r gle le niveau de saturation du rouge de la couleur choisie Vert r gle le niveau de saturation du vert de la couleur choisie Bleu r gle le niveau de saturation du bleu de la couleur choisie R gler r tablit les valeurs par d faut de l espace couleur quilibrage du blanc Vous pouvez r gler la temp rature de la couleur pour obtenir des couleurs d image plus naturelles D cal R r gle la profondeur du rouge D cal V r gle la profondeur du vert D cal B r gle la profondeur du bleu Gain R r gle la luminosit du rouge Gain V r gle la luminosit du vert Gain B r gle la luminosit du bleu R gler L quilibrage du blanc mis au point pr c demment sera ramen aux valeurs par d faut Ton chair Vous pouvez rehausser le ton chair rose de l image Une modification de la valeur des r glages entra ne un rafra chissement de l cran Am lioration des bords Off On Vous pouvez accentuer le bord des objets sur l image xvYCC Off On Le fait de r gler le mode xvYCC a marche augmente le d tail et l espace couleur pendant le visionnement de films depuis un appareil externe c a d un lecteur DVD branch aux prises HDMI ou Composante IN xvYCC est accessible lorsque le mode image est r gl sur Cin ma et que la source d entr e externe est r gl e au mode HDMI ou Composante Frangais 17 Q Options d im
195. ls externes branch s une entr e du t l viseur SS Source d entr e Image Format ATV AV Composante 480i 480p 16 9 Zoom1 Zoom2 4 3 num rique 1080i Composante 1080i 1080p HDMI 720p 1080i 1080p PC 16 9 4 3 16 9 4 3 Format large Plein cran Frangais 18 R duct bruit num Off Basse Moyen Haute Auto Si le signal de diffusion capt par votre t l viseur est faible vous pouvez activer la fonction de r duction num rique des bruits pour aider liminer les parasites et les images fant mes qui apparaissent l cran Lorsque le signal est faible s lectionnez une des autres options jusuqu ce que la meilleure image soit affich e Nv nr HDMI Normal Basse Vous pouvez choisir le niveau de noir l cran pour r gler la profondeur de ce dernier Cette fonction est active seulement lorsqu un appareil externe est branch un t l viseur par l entremise d un c ble HDMI II se peut que la fonction Nv nr HDMI ne soit pas compatible avec tous les appareils externes Mode Film Off Auto1 Auto2 ll est possible de r gler le t l viseur afin qu il d tecte et traite automatiquement les signaux de film provenant de toutes les sources et r gle l image pour obtenir une d finition optimale Mode Film est accessibles en modes TV Vid o Composante 480i 1080i et HDMI 480i 1080i e Off D sactive la fonction Mode Film e Auto1 R gle auto
196. mation extracted from a photo file may be different from your expectations You can change the Color and preference Z PTP does not support folder sort mode Basic View Shows the folders on the USB memory device If you select a folder and press the ENTER C button only the photo files contained in the selected folder are displayed When sorted according to the Basic View you cannot set Favorite files Timeline Sorts photos by date It sorts by year and month from the earliest photo Color Red Yellow Green Blue Magenta Black Gray Unclassified Sorts photos by Color You can change the photo Color information You should set the Use Color View to on in the Setup menu before sorting photos by Color Folder Sorts photos by folder If there are many folders in USB the photos files are shown in order in each folder The photo file in the Root folder is shown first and the others are shown in alphabetical order by name Preference kitki KK Sorts photos by preference Favorite You can change the photo preferences Changing the Favorites Setting Select the desired photo in the File List Section then press the Green button repeatedly until the desired setting appears Up to 3 stars can be selected The stars are for grouping purposes only For example the 3 star setting does not have any priority over the one star setting English 41 al Photo List Option Menu 1 Press the MEDIA P b
197. matiquement l image afin d obtenir la meilleure qualit pour le visionnement d un film e Auto2 Optimise automatiquement le texte vid o l cran sauf les sous titres pendant le visionnement d un film Mode bleu seu Off On Cette fonction est r serv e aux experts en mesures d appareils audiovisuels Cette fonction affiche le signal bleu seulement en liminant les signaux rouge et vert du signal vid o dans le but d offrir un effet de filtre bleu servant r gler la couleur et la teinte de l image d un appareil vid o comme un lecteur de DVD une cha ne de cin ma maison etc l aide de cette fonction vous pouvez r gler la couleur et la teinte en fonction des param tres convenant le mieux au niveau de signal de chaque appareil vid o l aide des motifs barres de couleur rouge verte bleue cyan magenta et jaune sans avoir utiliser de filtre bleu suppl mentaire Mode bleu seu est offert dans les modes Cin ma ou Standard Auto Motion Plus 120Hz Off Image claire Standard Lisse Personnel D mo Elimine la tra n e des sc nes rapides tr s anim es afin de rendre l image plus claire Si vous activez le mode Auto Motion Plus 120Hz des parasites peuvent appara tre l cran Le cas ch ant r glez Auto Motion Plus 120Hz sur Off Off D sactive Auto Motion Plus 120Hz off Image claire R gle Auto Motion Plus 120Hz sur minimum Standard R gle Auto Motion Plus 120Hz sur moyen
198. me du t l viseur puis r glez le volume l aide de la commande de volume de la cha ne amp La diffusion audio en 5 1 canaux est possible lorsque le t l viseur est raccord un appareil externe dot de cette fonction audio amp Lorsque le r cepteur de la cha ne de cin ma maison est r gl On vous pouvez entendre le son provenant de la prise optique du t l viseur Lorsque le t l viseur met des signaux num riques air il transmet le son en 5 1 canaux au r cepteur de la cha ne de cin ma maison Lorsque la source est un composant num rique comme un lecteur DVD Blu ray un c blos lecteur ou un r cepteur satellite bo tier d codeur et que ce dernier est branch au t l viseur l aide d un c ble HDMI le r cepteur de la cha ne de cin ma maison ne fera entendre qu un son en deux canaux Si vous d sirez entendre un son en 5 1 canaux branchez la prise de sortie audio num rique du lecteur DVD Blu ray cablos lecteur ou r cepteur satellite bo tier d codeur directement un amplificateur ou une cha ne de cin ma maison et non au t l viseur Fran ais 11 o LEE EX LINK Connecteur utilis a des fins de r paration seulement AUDIO OUT A brancher aux prises d entr e audio de votre amplificateur chaine de cin ma maison Lorsqu un amplificateur audio est branch aux prises de sortie gauche et dro
199. ment ne n cessite pas de c blos lecteur ni de r cepteur satellite Connexion HDMI DVI entre votre PC et ce t l viseur Excellente qualit d image La technologie SRS TruSurround HD offre un son ambiophonique Media Play Lecture de fichiers musicaux photo et film enregistr s sur un dispositif USB Accessoires wo T l commande BN59 00853A et Cordon d alimentation Chiffon de nettoyage piles AAA x 2 3903 000144 BN63 01798B 2 M4xL16 C ble m tallique de support Support pour t l viseur et vis X1 cane ae garanie BN61 05596A BN96 10788A Melo elo Riel Selon le mod le Selon le mod le I M4xL16 Vis de support X4 6002 001294 Panneau arri re LN37B650 LN40B630 LN46B630 LN52B630 LN32B650 BN63 05284A LN37B650 BN63 05285A LN40B640 LN46B640 LN40B630 BN63 05286A LN46B630 BN63 05287A LN52B630 BN63 05478A Vis de support X8 6002 001294 LN40B640 BN63 05385A LN46B640 BN63 05254A LN32B650 LN55B640 BN63 05452A Assurez vous que votre t l viseur ACL comprend les l ments suivants S il en manque communiquez avec votre d taillant La forme et la couleur des accessoires peuvent varier selon le mod le Fran ais 2 a Affichage du panneau de configuration La couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du mod le Les touches du panneau avant s activent par effleurement LN32B650 LN37B650 SOURCE
200. ms of this License in conveying all material for which you do not control copyright Those thus making or running the covered works for you must do so exclusively on your behalf under your direction and control on terms that prohibit them from making any copies of your copyrighted material outside their relationship with you Conveying under any other circumstances is permitted solely under the conditions stated below Sublicensing is not allowed section 10 makes it unnecessary Protecting Users Legal Rights From Anti Circumvention Law No covered work shall be deemed part of an effective technological measure under any applicable law fulfilling obligations under article 11 of the WIPO copyright treaty adopted on 20 December 1996 or similar laws prohibiting or restricting circumvention of such measures When you convey a covered work you waive any legal power to forbid circumvention of technological measures to the extent such circumvention is effected by exercising rights under this License with respect to the covered work and you disclaim any intention to limit operation or modification of the work as a means of enforcing against the work s users your or third parties legal rights to forbid circumvention of technological measures Conveying Verbatim Copies You may convey verbatim copies of the Program s source code as you receive it in any medium provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an approp
201. msung vous obtiendrez une image d une qualit plus riche Branchez des produits Samsung BD Wise l aide d un cable HDMI Lorsque le BD Wise est On le mode image passe automatiquement a la r solution optimale BD Wise est accessible en mode HDMI Q Type de r seau R glage du r seau Pour les proc dures d taill es concernant la configuration des options veuillez consulter les instructions de la rubrique Configuration du r seau voir pages 30 35 Q V Chip La fonction V Chip exclut automatiquement les programmes qui sont consid r s comme inappropri s pour les enfants L utilisateur doit entrer un NIP num ro d identification personnel avant de pouvoir configurer ou modifier les restrictions de la fonction V Chip V Chip n est pas disponible en mode HDMI Composante ou PC Le code NIP par d faut d un nouveau t l viseur est 0 0 0 0 Perm tout D verrouille toutes les classifications du t l viseur Bloq tout Verrouille toutes les classifications du t l viseur Changer NIP L cran Changer NIP s affiche Choisissez un code NIP quatre chiffres et saisissez le Lorsque vous avez entr le code NIP quatre chiffres l cran Confirmer NIP appara t Saisissez de nouveau les quatre chiffres Lorsque l cran de confirmation dispara t votre code NIP est m moris Si vous avez oubli votre code NIP appuyez sur les touches de la t l commande dans l ordre suivant pour r tablir le code 0 0 0 0 POWE
202. musical ne se trouve pas au d but du fichier sa dur e de lecture pourrait s afficher sous la forme 00 00 00 lt j REW ou gt gt FF ne fonctionnent pas pendant la lecture Touches de commande de lecture de la musique Touche Fonctions ENTERC Lecture pause du fichier musical gt Lecture du fichier musical il Pause du fichier musical Quitter le mode de lecture et revenir la liste de musique TOOLS Ex cuter diverses fonctions du menu Musique Ic ne d information de la fonction Musique et R p te la lecture de tous les fichiers musicaux ou du fichier s lectionn dans le dossier Modo v rep r gl On Lecture unique de tous les fichiers musicaux ou du fichier s lectionn dans le dossier Modo rep Si r gl Off Lecture du groupe musical 1 2 3 4 Appuyez sur la touche A pour passer a la section Cl de tri Appuyez sur la touche lt ou gt pour choisir un crit re de classement Appuyez sur la touche ou ENTER pour passer la section Liste des groupes Appuyez sur la touche gt Lecture La lecture des fichiers du groupe choisi s amorce Ou encore Choisissez une cl de tri Choisissez ensuite les fichiers du groupe d sir dans la section Liste des fichiers Pour passer au groupe pr c dent ou suivant appuyez sur la touche lt lt REW ou gt gt FF Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour choisir Lire groupe c
203. must display Appropriate Legal Notices however if the Program has interactive interfaces that do not display Appropriate Legal Notices your work need not make them do so A compilation of a covered work with other separate and independent works which are not by their nature extensions of the covered work and which are not combined with it such as to form a larger program in or on a volume of a storage or distribution medium is called an aggregate if the compilation and its resulting copyright are not used to limit the access or legal rights of the compilation s users beyond what the individual works permit Inclusion of a covered work in an aggregate does not cause this License to apply to the other parts of the aggregate Conveying Non Source Forms You may convey a covered work in object code form under the terms of sections 4 and 5 provided that you also convey the machine readable Corresponding Source under the terms of this License in one of these ways a Convey the object code in or embodied in a physical product including a physical distribution medium accompanied by the Corresponding Source fixed on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange b Convey the object code in or embodied in a physical product including a physical distribution medium accompanied by a written offer valid for at least three years and valid for as long as you offer spare parts or customer support for that prod
204. n Liste des fichiers Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour choisir Diaporama puis sur ENTERC Tous les fichiers de la liste des photos feront partie du diaporama Hieron strait Pendant le diaporama les fichiers s affichent dans l ordre a partir du fichier affich Le diaporama se d roule dans l ordre de classement de la section Liste des fichiers Les fichiers musicaux peuvent tre lus automatiquement pendant le diaporama si l option Musique de fond est r gl e On Pendant l affichage d une photo appuyez sur la touche gt Lecture ENTER LC de la t l commande pour lancer le diaporama Touches de commande du diaporama Touche Fonctions C Pause lt 4 Pr c Suiv 41 Outils D Retour ENTERCS Lecture pause du diaporama gt Lecture du diaporama nl Pause du diaporama Quitter le diaporama et retourner la liste des photos lt P gt Modifier la vitesse de lecture du diaporama TOOLS Ex cuter diverses fonctions des menus Photo Appuyez sur la touche A pour passer a la section Cl de tri Appuyez sur la touche lt ou gt pour choisir un crit re de classement Appuyez sur la touche W pour passer a la section Liste des groupes Choisissez un groupe l aide des touches lt ou gt Appuyez sur la touche gt Lecture Un diaporama commence avec les fichiers du
205. n branchement de c ble distinct pourrait entra ner un probl me ag fz p de compatibilit USB Avant de brancher votre dispositif au t l viseur veuillez faire une copie de sauvegarde de vos fichiers afin d viter les dommages ou les pertes de donn es SAMSUNG n est pas responsable des dommages ou des pertes de donn es Branchez un USB HDD au port d di le port USB1 HDD Avertissement Ne pas d passer 1 5 A Ne d branchez pas le dispositif USB pendant son chargement MSC prend en charge les fichiers MP3 et JPEG ainsi que les fichiers films tandis qu un dispositif PTP ne prend en charge que les fichiers JPEG Plus la r solution de l image est lev e plus elle prend du temps s afficher l cran La r solution JPEG maximale prise en charge est 15360 X 8640 pixels Le message Format fichier non compatible s affiche pour les fichiers non pris en charge ou les fichiers corrompus Si la cl de tri est en position Aff de base jusqu 1000 fichiers peuvent tre affich s dans chacun des dossiers L autre cl de tri peut afficher jusqu 10000 fichiers Les fichiers MP3 prot g s par DRM t l charg s de sites payants ne peuvent tre lus La gestion des droits num riques DRM est une technologie qui soutient la cr ation la distribution et la gestion du contenu de fa on int gr e et globale notamment par la protection des droits et int r ts des fournisseurs de contenu la pr vention de la copie ill ga
206. n determining whether a product is a consumer product doubtful cases shall be resolved in favor of coverage For a particular product received by a particular user normally used refers to a typical or common use of that class of product regardless of the status of the particular user or of the way in which the particular user actually uses or expects or is expected to use the product A product is a consumer product regardless of whether the product has substantial commercial industrial or non consumer uses unless such uses represent the only significant mode of use of the product Installation Information for a User Product means any methods procedures authorization keys or other information required to install and execute modified versions of a covered work in that User Product from a modified version of its Corresponding Source The information must suffice to ensure that the continued functioning of the modified object code is in no case prevented or interfered with solely because modification has been made If you convey an object code work under this section in or with or specifically for use in a User Product and the conveying occurs as part of a transaction in which the right of possession and use of the User Product is transferred to the recipient in perpetuity or for a fixed term regardless of how the transaction is characterized the Corresponding Source conveyed under this section must be accompanied by the Install
207. n press the ENTER C button amp The selected files will be used for the Slide Show a Slide Show Option Menu 1 During a slide show or when viewing a photo press the TOOLS button to set the option 2 Press the A or Y button to select the desired option then press the ENTERL button on Q Stop Slide Show Start Slide Show You can start or stop a SlideShow TA SA Information A Move C Enter Exit Sound Setting Q Slide Show Speed Slow Normal Fast You can select the slide show speed This function is available only during a slide show You can also change the speed of the Slide Show by pressing the lt lt REW or gt gt FF button during the Slide Show Q Slide Show Effect You can select the screen transition effect used in the slideshow None Fade Fade2 Blind Spiral Checker Linear Stairs Wipe Random This function is available only during a slide show Q Rotate You can rotate photos saved on a USB memory device Whenever you press the lt button it rotates by 270 180 90 and 0 Whenever you press the gt button it rotates by 90 180 270 and 0 The rotated file is not saved English 44 Q Zoom You can magnify photos saved on a USB memory device x1 x2 x4 To move the enlarged photo image press the ENTER C button then press the A lt P buttons Note that when the enlarged picture is smaller than
208. ne peuvent pas tre configur s de la m me couleur Opacit avant plan et Opacit arri re plan ne peuvent pas tre tous deux r gl s sur Transparent S Q M lodie Off Basse Moyen Haute Vous pouvez choisir et configurer une m lodie qui se d clenchera la mise en marche et l arr t du t l viseur La m lodie ne joue pas Le t l viseur n met aucun son parce que vous avez appuy sur la touche MUTE Le t l viseur n met aucun son parce que le volume a t r duit au minimum l aide de la touche VOL Lorsque la fonction Sleep Timer met le t l viseur hors tension Q conomiseur nergie Off Basse Moyen Haute Auto Cette option permet de r gler la luminosit de l cran afin de r duire la consommation d nergie Lorsqu on regarde la t l vision le soir il faut r gler l option du mode Economiseur nergie Haute pour r duire la fatigue oculaire et la consommation d nergie Q Isl Pour les proc dures d taill es concernant la configuration des options veuillez consulter la rubrique Visionnement Image sur Image voir page 20 i R glage de l horloge Q Horloge Le r glage de l horloge est n cessaire pour pouvoir utiliser les diverses fonctions de minuterie AGENT Langue Fran ais du t l viseur L heure s affiche chaque fois que vous appuyez sur la touche INFO Si vous d branchez le cordon d alimentation vous devez r gler l horloge de nouveau He
209. nes au t l viseur Contacter Samsung Consultez cette rubrique lorsque votre t l viseur ne fonctionne pas correctement ou lorsque vous souhaitez mettre niveau le logiciel Vous pouvez consulter l information concernant le centre d appel le produit ou la m thode de t l chargement du logiciel Fran ais 37 MEDIA PLAY USB al Connecting a USB Device 1 Appuyez sur la touche POWER pour mettre le t l viseur sous tension 2 Branchez un dispositif USB contenant des photos de la musique ou des fichiers vid o dans la prise USB1 HDD ou USB2 situ e sur le c t du t l viseur 3 Lorsque l cran de s lection Application s affiche appuyez sur la touche ENTER 4 pour choisir Media Play USB S S BBDD BBS S 5 5 D Panneau lat ral du t l viseur G ETS Le MTP protocole de transfert de m dia n est pas pris en charge Le syst me de fichier prend en charge FAT16 FAT32 et NTFS Certains types de cam ra num rique et de dispositif audio USB pourraient tre incompatibles avec ce t l viseur Media Play ne prend en charge que les dispositifs USB m moire de grande capacit MSC MSC est un dispositif de transport m moire de grande capacit en bloc seulement Parmi les exemples de MSC on trouve les disques Thumb les lecteurs de cartes Flash et USB HDD USB HUB n est pas pris en charge Veuillez vous brancher directement au port USB de votre t l viseur L utilisation d u
210. ng customer service at 1 800 SAMSUNG Problem Possible Solution Poor picture Try another channel Adjust the antenna Check all wire connections Poor sound quality Try another channel Adjust the antenna No picture or sound Try another channel Press the SOURCE button Make sure the TV is plugged in Check the antenna connections No sound or sound is too low at maximum volume First check the volume of units connected to your TV digital broadcasting receiver DVD cable broadcasting receiver VCR etc Then adjust the TV volume accordingly Picture rolls vertically Check all wire connections There is a problem with the picture Run the Picture test in the Self diagnostic menu There is a problem with the sound The TV operates erratically Run the Sound test in the Self diagnostic menu Unplug the TV for 30 seconds then try operating it again The TV won t turn on Make sure the wall outlet is working Remote control malfunctions Replace the remote control batteries Clean the upper edge of the remote control transmission window Check the battery terminals Check signal cable message Ensure that the signal cable is firmly connected to the PC source Not Supported Mode message Check the maximum resolution and connected device s Video frequency Compare these values with the data in the Display Modes Digital broadcas
211. ngton sur un bureau ou tout autre objet lourd inamovible S curisation de l espace d installation Respectez les distances requises entre le produit et les autres objets p ex les murs afin d assurer une bonne ventilation Le non respect de ces distances pourrait faire augmenter la temp rature interne du produit et causer un incendie ou endommager le produit Installez le produit de mani re que les distances obligatoires indiqu es dans la figure soient respect es Lorsque vous utilisez un support ou un support mural utilisez seulement les pi ces fournies par Samsung Electronics e Si vous utilisez des pi ces fournies par un autre fabricant cela pourrait endommager le produit ou causer des blessures engendr es par la chute du produit e Si vous utilisez des pi ces fournies par un autre fabricant vous risquez d endommager le produit ou de causer un incendie engendr par l augmentation interne de la temp rature du produit attribuable une mauvaise ventilation L aspect peut diff rer selon le produit La couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du mod le Lorsque vous installez le produit sur un support Lorsque vous installez le produit au mur Fran ais 65 Stabilisation du t l viseur par rapport au mur ou une armoire La couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du mod le Attention Le t l viseur pourrait
212. notice Refer to the dimensions prior to performing installation of your TV Not responsible for typographical or printed errors 2009 Samsung Electronics America Inc h 72 LN40B630 A o TOP VIEW D ecce eco Oo LAN 39 2 20 5 1 FRONT VIEW C 100 SIDE VIEW i 7 9 200 mm 7 9 200 mm T REAR VIEW Englis NOTE All drawings are not necessarily to scale Some dimensions are subject to change without prior notice Refer to the dimensions prior to performing installation of your TV Not responsible for typographical or printed errors 2009 Samsung Electronics America Inc h 73 LN46B630 aT TOP VIEW JACK PANEL DETAIL 5 2 H X 6 6 W 3 1 I 44 0 k i f 21 7 j Fo FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW 15 7 400 mm 15 7 400 mm REAR VIEW NOTE All drawings are not necessarily to scale Some dimensions are subject to change without prior notice Refer to the dimensions prior to performing installation of your TV Not responsible for typographical or printed errors 2009 Samsung Electronics America Inc English 74 LN52B630 aT TOP VIEW JACK PANEL DETAIL 5 2 H X 6 6 W 3 1 I
213. nsistent with the requirements of this License Each contributor grants you a non exclusive worldwide royalty free patent license under the contributor s essential patent claims to make use sell offer for sale import and otherwise run modify and propagate the contents of its contributor version In the following three paragraphs a patent license is any express agreement or commitment however denominated not to enforce a patent such as an express permission to practice a patent or covenant not to sue for patent infringement To grant such a patent license to a party means to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party 12 13 14 15 16 17 If you convey a covered work knowingly relying on a patent license and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy free of charge and under the terms of this License through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means then you must either 1 cause the Corresponding Source to be so available or 2 arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work or 3 arrange in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License to extend the patent license to downstream recipients Knowingly relying means you have actual knowledge that but for the patent license your conveying the covered work in a country or your recipient s use of the
214. nt assurant que la meilleure qualit HD s affiche V rifiez la description et appuyez sur la touche ENTER C 10 Le message En mode diffusion s affiche Appuyer sur la touche ENTER C lorsque termin Si vous souhaitez r initialiser ce param tre 1 Appuyez sur la touche MENU pour afficher le menu Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour s lectionner Configuration puis sur ENTER C4 Pr t l emploi 2 Apppuyez sur ENTER CS de nouveau pour choisir Pr t l emploi ae mes La fonction Pr t l emploi n est accessible qu en mode TV Hoe R glage du r seau V Chip Frangais 7 CONNEXIONS a Connexion d antennes VHF et UHF i votre antenne comporte un cable semblable celui de l illustration de droite reportez vous Si voti t rt bl blabl lui de l illustration de droit rt Antennes avec c ble bipolaire plat de 300 Q ci dessous ue Si votre antenne est dot e d un c ble semblable celui de l illustration de droite reportez vous la section Antenne quip e de c bles ronds 75 Q Si vous avez deux antennes voir Antennes VHF et UHF s par es Antennes avec c ble bipolaire plat de 300 Q Si vous utilisez une antenne de toit ou des oreilles de lapin pourvus d un c ble bipolaire plat 4 de 300 Q suivez les instructions ci dessous 1 Placez les fils du c ble bipolaire sous les vis de l adaptateur de 300 75 Q non fourni aD Utilisez un tournevis pour s
215. nt aucun son assurez vous que le mode S lect le haut parleur est r gl Haut parleur TV dans le menu Son amp Vous entendrez la m lodie durant l essai m me si le mode S lect le haut parleur est r gl Haut p externe ou si vous avez coup le son avec la touche MUTE e Qui Si au cours de l essai de son un seul haut parleur met du son ou si les deux haut parleurs n mettent aucun son s lectionnez Oui Il est possible que votre t l viseur soit d fectueux Communiquez avec le centre d appel Samsung pour obtenir de l assistance e Non Siles haut parleurs mettent un son normal s lectionnez Non Il est possible qu un appareil externe soit d fectueux Veuillez v rifier les connexions Si le probl me persiste consultez le guide d utilisation de l appareil externe Puissance signal canaux num riques seulement Contrairement aux canaux analogiques dont la qualit de r ception peut varier de neigeuse claire les canaux num riques HDTV offrent soit une r ception parfaite soit aucune r ception Ainsi contrairement aux canaux analogiques vous ne pouvez pas syntoniser les canaux num riques Cependant vous pouvez r gler votre antenne afin d am liorer la r ception des canaux num riques disponibles Si l indicateur de puissance indique que le signal num rique est faible d placez l antenne Panneau lat ral du t l viseur can qu de mani re augmenter la puissance du signal Co
216. nt l entr e de signaux HDMI 720p 1080i 1080p composantes 1080i 1080p ou num riques 1080i A Ay Zoom D pl FT Zoom1 Format large 4 3 Plein cran Lorsque le mode Double m ME est r gl sur ISI le param tre Image Format ne peut pas tre r gl Une r manence d image temporaire peut se produire si une image fixe est affich e l cran pendant plus de deux heures Apr s avoir s lectionn Zoom1 Zoom2 ou Format large appuyez sur la touche gt pour s lectionner Position puis sur ENTER C amp Appuyer sur la touche A ou YW pour d placer l image vers le bas et le haut Appuyez ensuite sur la touche ENTER C amp Appuyez sur la touche gt pour choisir Format puis sur ENTER C4 Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour agrandir ou r duire le format vertical de l image Appuyez ensuite sur la touche ENTERCS amp Apr s avoir s lectionn Plein cran en mode HDMI 1080i 1080p ou Composante 1080i 1080p il est possible que vous deviez centrer l image appuyez sur la touche lt ou pour s lectionner Position puis sur ENTER C Appuyez sur la touche A Y lt ou gt pour d placer l image R gler Appuyez sur la touche lt ou pour s lectionner R gler puis sur ENTER C4 Il est possible d initialiser le r glage HD Haute d finition 16 9 1080i 1080p 1920x1080 720p 1280x720 Les r glages peuvent tre d finis et m moris s pour chacun des apparei
217. nt so the correct USB is read Repeat Select Once Everyday Mon Fri Mon Sat Sat Sun or Manual When Manual is selected press the button to select the desired day of the week Press the ENTER C4 button over the desired day and the Y mark will appear You can set the hour minute and channel by pressing the number buttons on the remote control Auto Power Off When you set the timer on the television will eventually turn off if no controls are operated for 3 hours after the TV was turned on by the timer This function is only available in timer on mode and prevents overheating which may occur if a TV is on for too long time English 29 Network Connection You can set up the Internet Protocol so that you can communicate with various connected networks Q Network Connection Cable LAN Connection for a DHCP Environment The procedures to set up the network using Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP are described below Since an IP address subnet mask gateway and DNS are automatically allocated when DHCP is selected you do not have to enter them manually 1 Connect the LAN port on the rear panel of the TV and the external modem with a LAN Cable 2 Connect the Modem port on the wall and the external modem with a Modem Cable The Modem Port on the Wall External Modem TV Rear Panel ADSL VDSL Cable TV LAN Cable Modem Cable You c
218. ntact Samsung s call center for assistance e No If the test pattern is properly displayed select No There may be a problem with your external equipment Please check your connections If the problem still persists refer to the Self Diagnosis external device s user manual Sound Test Move Enter 9 Return English 36 Sound Test If you think you have a sound problem please perform the sound test You can check the sound by playing a built in melody sound through the TV If you hear no sound from the TV s speakers before performing the sound test make sure Speaker Select is set to TV speaker in the Sound menu amp The melody will be heard during the test even if Speaker Select is set to External Speaker or the sound is muted by pressing the MUTE button e Yes If during the sound test you can hear sound only from one speaker or not at all select Yes There may be a problem with the TV Contact Samsung s call center for assistance e No If you can hear sound from the speakers select No There may be a problem with your external equipment Please check your connections If the problem still persists refer to the external device s user manual Signal Strength digital channels only Unlike analog channels which can vary in reception quality from snowy to clear digital HDTV channels have either perfect reception quality or you will not receive them at all So unlike analog channels you cannot fine t
219. ntinuez a r gler l antenne jusqu ce que vous trouviez la bonne orientation permettant d obtenir un signal maximum 1a dao Cl USB em Mise jour du logiciel Samsung mettra votre disposition des mises niveau du micrologiciel pour votre t l viseur Mise jour du logiciel Les mises niveaux peuvent tre effectu es par l entremise de votre t l viseur lorsqu il est connect Internet ou en t l chargeant le nouveau micrologiciel sur une cl USB partir du site samsung com USB En ligne Version actuelle est le logiciel actuellement install dans votre t l viseur Autre logiciel 101 16 000000 amp Autre logiciel Backup vous montre la version pr c dente qui sera remplac e amp Le logiciel est pr sent sous la forme ann e mois jour_ Version Plus la date est r cente plus la version logicielle est r cente Nous vous recommandons d installer la version la plus r cente USB Ins rez la cl USB contenant le microgiciel niveau t l charg partir du site samsung com dans le t l viseur Veillez ne pas interrompre l alimentation ou retirer la cl USB pendant que la proc dure de mise niveau est en cours Le t l viseur se mettra hors tension et red marrera automatiquement une fois la mise niveau termin e Veuillez v rifier la version du micrologiciel une fois les mises jour termin es le num ro de la nouvelle version sera sup rieur celui d
220. nu You can also set the Auto Adjustment by selecting Tools Auto Adjustment This function does not work in DVI Digital mode Q Screen Coarse Fine The purpose of picture quality adjustment is to remove or reduce picture noise If the noise is not removed by Fine tuning alone then adjust the frequency as best as possible Coarse and Fine tune again After the noise has been reduced readjust the picture so that it is aligned on the center of screen PC Position Adjust the PC s screen positioning if it does not fit the TV screen Press the A or Y button to adjusting the Vertical Position Press the lt or gt button to adjust the Horizontal Position Image Reset You can replace all image settings with the factory default values English 22 Brightness Auto Adjustment Screen Advanced Settings Picture Options Picture Reset Screen Coarse Fine PC Position Image Reset Move Enter 9 Return You can configure the sound mode volume multi track sound options etc Configuring the Sound Menu Q Mode Standard Music Movie Clear Voice Custom A Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu You can also set the sound mode by selecting Tools Sound Mode Standard Selects the normal sound mode ie Oh Music Emphasizes music over voices PS grea Movie Provides the best sound for movies ee TV Speaker Clear Voice Emphasizes voice over other sounds Custom Recalls your cu
221. o magnify or reduce the picture size in the vertical direction Then press the ENTER CS button After selecting Screen Fit in HDMI 1080i 1080p or Component 1080i 1080p mode you made need to center the picture Press the lt or gt button to select Position then press the ENTER C button Press the A Y lt or gt button to move the picture Reset Press the lt or gt button to select Reset then press the ENTER 4 button You can initialize the setting HD High Definition 16 9 1080i 1080p 1920x1080 720p 1280x720 Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV S amp S Input Source Picture Size ATV AV Component 480i 480p 16 9 Zoom1 Zoom2 4 3 DTV 1080i Component 1080i 1080p HDMI 720p 1080i 1080p PC 16 9 4 3 16 9 4 3 Wide Fit Screen Fit English 18 Digital NR Off Low Medium High Auto If the broadcast signal received by your TV is weak you can activate the Digital Noise Reduction feature to help reduce any static and ghosting that may appear on the screen When the signal is weak select one of the other options until the best picture is displayed HDMI Black Level Normal Low You can select the black level on the screen to adjust the screen depth This function is active only when an external device is connected to the TV via HDMI The HDMI Black Level function may not be com
222. object code with such an offer in accord with subsection 6b d Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place gratis or for a charge and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code If the place to copy the object code is a network server the Corresponding Source may be on a different server operated by you or a third party that supports equivalent copying facilities provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements e Convey the object code using peer to peer transmission provided you inform other peers where the object code and Corresponding Source of the work are being offered to the general public at no charge under subsection 6d A separable portion of the object code whose source code is excluded from the Corresponding Source as a System Library need not be included in conveying the object code work A User Product is either 1 a consumer product which means any tangible personal property which is normally used for personal family or household purposes or 2 anything designed or sold for incorporation into a dwelling I
223. of software on general purpose computers but in those that do we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary To prevent this the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non free The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow TERMS AND CONDITIONS 0 Definitions This License refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License Copyright also means copyright like laws that apply to other kinds of works such as semiconductor masks The Program refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License Each licensee is addressed as you Licensees and recipients may be individuals or organizations To modify a work means to copy from or adapt all or part of the work in a fashion requiring copyright permission other than the making of an exact copy The resulting work is called a modified version of the earlier work or a work based on the earlier work A covered work means either the unmodified Program or a work based on the Program To propagate a work means to do anything with it that without permission would make you directly or secondarily liable for infringement under applicable copyright law except executing it on a computer or modifying a private copy Propagation includes copying distribution with or without modification making available to the pub
224. of the image on your screen Your TV comes with several screen size options each designed to work best with specific types of video input Your cable box satellite receiver may have its own set of screen sizes as well In general though you should view the TV in 16 9 mode as much as possible Alternately you can press the P SIZE button on the remote control repeatedly to change the picture size e 16 9 Sets the picture to 16 9 wide mode Zoom1 Magnifies the size of the picture on the screen Zoom2 Magnifies the size of the picture more than Zoom1 Wide Fit Enlarges the aspect ratio of the picture to fit the entire screen 4 3 Sets the picture to 4 3 normal mode Screen Fit Use the function to see the full image without any cutoff when HDMI 720p 1080i 1080p Component 1080i 1080p or DTV 1080i signals are input ma pe Zoom2 Move as 16 9 Zoom1 aa alha 4e Wide Fit Move Wide Fit 4 3 Screen Fit When Double m ME mode has been set in PIP the Picture Size cannot be set Temporary image retention may occur when viewing a static image on the set for more than two hours After selecting Zoom1 Zoom2 or Wide Fit Press the gt button to Select Position then press the ENTER C button Press the A or Y button to move the picture up and down Then press the ENTER L button Press the gt button to Select Size then press the ENTER C button Press the A or Y button t
225. of your TV Not responsible for typographical or printed errors 2009 Samsung Electronics America Inc English 77 3 1 LN55B640 L TOP VIEW g JACK PANEL DETAIL 5 2 H X 6 6 W 3 3 L 53 7 r 7 k 47 6 32 4 26 8 34 8 21 6 AAT FRONT VIEW SIDE VIEW 15 7 400 mm REAR VIEW NOTE All drawings are not necessarily to scale Some dimensions are subject to change without prior notice Refer to the dimensions prior to performing installation of your TV Not responsible for typographical or printed errors 2009 Samsung Electronics America Inc English 78 e This product uses parts of the software from the Independent JPEG Group e This product uses parts of the software owned by the Freetype Project www freetype org e This product uses some software programs which are distributed under the GPL LGPL license Accordingly the following GPL and LGPL software source codes that have been used in this product can be provided after asking to viswmanager samsung com GPL software Linux Kernel Busybox Binutils LGPL software Glibc ffmpeg smpeg libgphoto libusb SDL il GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 3 29 June 2007 Copyright C 2007 Free Software Foundation Inc lt http fsf org gt Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license documen
226. oire 3 V rifiez l tat des connexions Inspectez p riodiquement les connexions en cas de signes de fatigue ou de pannes Si vous n tes pas certain des connexions effectuer communiquez avec un installateur professionnel Fran ais 66 F Sp cifications Mod le LN32B650 Taille de l cran 32 pouces diagonale 31 6 pouces en diagonale R solution PC Optimale 1920 x 1080 60 Hz Son Sortie 10W x 2 Dimensions L x P x H Sans support Avec support 31 6 x 3 0 x 21 5 po 802 9 x 77 1 x 544 9 mm 31 6 x 9 4 x 23 7 po 802 9 x 239 0 x 601 0 mm Poids Sans support Avec support 23 8 lb 10 8 Kg 31 1 Ib 14 1 Kg Facteurs environnementaux Temp rature de fonctionnement Niveau d humidit durant le fonctionnement Temp rature pour l entreposage Niveau d humidit pour l entreposage 50 F 104 F 10 C 40 C 10 80 sans condensation 4 F 113 F 20 C 45 C 5 95 sans condensation Support pivotant Gauche Droite 20 20 Mod le LN37B650 Taille de l cran 37 pouces diagonale 37 1 pouces en diagonale R solution PC Optimale 1920 x 1080 60 Hz Son Sortie 10W x 2 Dimensions L x P x H Sans support Avec support 36 5 x 3 1 x 24 0 po 926 7 x 78 2 x 608 4 mm 36 5 x 10 0 x 26 3 po 926 7 x 255 0 x 668 2 mm Poids Sans support Avec support 29 5 lb 13 4 Kg 38
227. on Anynet HDMI CEC Marche Arr t automatique Non Oui Arrekauempatiqua Ou R glage de la mise hors tension automatique en m me temps que celle du t l viseur d un appareil Anynet La source active de la t l commande du t l viseur doit tre r gl e a TV afin de pouvoir utiliser la fonction Anynet Si le mode Arr t automatique est r gl a Oui les appareils externes branch s sont galement mis hors tension en m me temps que le t l viseur Cependant si un appareil est en mode d enregistrement il se peut qu il soit mis hors tension ou non D p Intro Retour Aynet Configuration Anynet HDMI CEC Marche Arr t automatique Oui D pl C Intro D Retour il Permutation entre appareils Anynett 1 Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS Appuyez sur la touche ENTER C pour s lectionner la fonction Anynett HDMI CEC 2 Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour s lectionner Liste appareils puis sur la touche a S ENTER 4 Enregistrer DVDR Anynet branch s au t l viseur s affiche Re DVDR INFO S il est impossible de trouver l appareil d sir appuyez sur la touche rouge pour R cepteur Arr t effectuer un balayage des appareils 3 Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour s lectionner un appareil puis sur ENTER C Le Syner Configuration syst me commande l appareil s lectionn SAE ER EE Ce n est qu apr s avoir r gl Anynet HDMI CEC Marche dans le menu Application que le
228. on et le chemin d acc s est affich e Vous pouvez afficher l information des fichiers musicaux pendant la Lire groupe courant l aide de la m me marche suivre Appuyez sur la touche INFO pour afficher l information C a A ms Q Supp s curit ll est possible de retirer le dispositif du t l viseur de fa on s re Fran ais 47 D Lecture musicale Lecture d un fichier musical 1 2 3 Appuyez sur la touche Y pour s lectionner la section Liste des fichiers T gt 00 00 04 00 04 04 7 3 37 Appuyez sur la touche lt ou gt pour s lectionner le fichier musical lire wg RUE D HUE Appuyez sur la touche gt Lecture ENTER C Ce menu affiche uniquement les fichiers pourvus d une extension MP3 Les fichiers comportant d autres extensions ne sont pas affich s m me s ils sont d P sauvegard s sur le dispositif USB Le fichier s lectionn est affich en t te de liste avec sa dur e de lecture Pour r gler le volume de la musique appuyez sur la touche de volume de ER CRE pS SEE la t l commande Pour couper le son appuyer sur la touche MUTE de la t l commande Sile volume semble trange pendant la lecture de fichiers MP3 r glez l galiseur et le SRS TruSurround HD du menu Son un fichier MP3 surmodul peut causer des probl mes sonores Si la dur e du fichier
229. on the information from VH the broadcasting station it may not be available for use E Parental restriction levels differ depending on the broadcasting station The default O Move C Ener gt Reim menu name and Downloadable US rating changes depending on the downloaded information Even if you set the On screen display to your desired language the Downloadable U S Rating menu will appear in English only The rating will automatically block certain categories that are more restrictive The rating titles For example Humor Level etc and TV ratings For example DH MH H etc may differ depending on the broadcasting station 2 How to Reset the TV after the V Chip Blocks a Channel Emergency Escape If the TV is tuned to a restricted channel the V Chip will block it The screen will go blank and the following message will appear This channel is blocked by V Chip Please enter the PIN 1 Enter your PIN then press the A or Y button to temporarily disable the V Chip Lock COUR If you forget the PIN press the remote control buttons in the following sequence which O E resets the pin to 0 0 0 0 POWER off MUTE 8 2 4 POWER on 4 re g Received Rating MPAA X Canadian English C8 LL VH Q Caption On Screen Text Messages Caption Off On You can switch the caption function on or off If captions are not available they will not be displayed on the screen Press the CC button on
230. ont affich s dans l ordre dans chaque dossier Les fichiers photo du dossier racine est affich en premier et les autres dans l ordre alphab tique par nom Q P pr f wl kiwi kkk Les photos sont class es par pr f rence Favori Il est possible de modifier les pr f rences de photo Modification du r glage favori Choisissez la photo d sir e dans la liste des photos et appuyez ensuite r p tition sur la touche verte jusqu l affichage du r glage d sir Jusqu 3 toiles peuvent tre s lectionn es Les toiles servent des fins de regroupement seulement Par exemple un m dia trois toiles n a pas priorit sur un m dia une toile Fran ais 41 il Options du menu Liste des photos 1 Appuyez sur la touche MEDIA P 2 Appuyez sur la touche lt ou pour choisir Photo puis sur ENTER C ie Appuyez sur la touche lt ou gt pour choisir le fichier photo d sir S lection de plusieurs photos Appuyez sur la touche lt ou pour choisir le fichier photo d sir Appuyez ensuite sur la touche jaune R p tez l tape pr c dente pour s lectionner plusieurs fichiers photo Le symbole Y s affiche c t du fichier photo s lectionn 4 Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS Les options de menu varient selon l tat actuel Q Diaporama Ce menu permet de lire un diaporama cr l aide des fichiers photo du dispositif de m moire USB Q Lire groupe courant Ce menu perm
231. ote control VOL Press to increase or decrease the volume In the on screen menu use the VOL buttons as you would use the lt and gt buttons on the remote control MENU Press to see an on screen menu of your TV s features SOURCE 4 Toggles between all the available input sources In the on screen menu use this button as you use the ENTER LC button on the remote control REMOTE CONTROL SENSOR Aim the remote control towards this spot on the TV SPEAKERS English 3 You can use the remote control up to a distance of about 23 feet from the TV The performance of the remote control may be affected by bright light The product color and shape may vary depending on the model POWER Turns the TV on and off TV Selects the TV mode directly NUMERIC BUTTONS Press to change the channel Press to select additional channels digital being broadcast by the same station For example to select channel 54 3 press 54 then press and 3 VOL Press to increase or decrease the volume SOURCE Press to display and select the available video sources CH LIST Used to display Channel Lists on the screen TOOLS Use to quickly select frequently used functions INFO L Press to use the News Stock Market and Weather Forecast information services available over Samsung s network COLOR BUTTONS Use these buttons in the Channel list Media Pl
232. ou can choose only those external devices that are connected to the TV In the Source List connected inputs will be highlighted and sorted to the top Inputs that are not UML OME connected will be sorted to the bottom If USB devices are connected to the USB1 HDD and USB2 jacks they are displayed as USB1 and USB2 in order i PC always stays activated Using the color buttons on the remote with the Source list Red Refresh Refreshes the connected external devices Press this if your Source is on and connected but does not appear in the list Rete E Tools TOOLS Tools Displays the Edit Name and Information menus Ak Source List Edit Name Ss Q Edit Name VCR DVD Cable STB Satellite STB PVR STB AV Receiver Game Camcorder PC DVI DVI PC TV IPTV Blu ray HD DVD DMA Name the device connected to the input jacks to make your input source selection easier When a PC with a resolution of 1920 x 1080 60Hz is connected to the HDMI IN 1 DVI port you should set the HDMI1 DVI mode to DVI PC in the Edit Name of the Input mode Support Menu Q Self Diagnosis Picture Test 2 Self Diagnosis i If you think you have a picture problem perform the picture test Check the color pattern on the AE screen to see if the problem still exists Contact Samsung e Yes If the test pattern does not appear or there is noise in the test pattern select Yes There may be a problem with the TV Co
233. ourant puis sur ENTERCS Les fichiers musicaux contenus dans le groupe de tri du fichier s lectionn sont lus Lecture des fichiers musicaux s lectionn s e om Appuyez sur la touche Y pour s lectionner la section Liste des fichiers Appuyez sur la touche lt ou gt pour choisir le fichier musical d sir Appuyez sur la touche jaune R p tez l tape pr c dente pour s lectionner plusieurs fichiers musicaux Le symbole v appara t gauche du fichier musical s lectionn Pour d s lectionner tous les fichiers appuyez sur la touche TOOLS et choisissez D s lect tout Appuyez sur la touche gt Lecture ENTER L Les fichiers choisis sont lus Frangais 48 F Options du menu Lecture de la musique Options du menu Lecture de la musique Q Modo rep On Off Vous pouvez lire des fichiers musicaux r p tition Q R glage de l image R glage du son Vous pouvez choisir les r glages de l image et les r glages sonores D p 4 R glage Quitter Q Information L information du fichier musical s affiche Q Supp s curit ll est possible de retirer le dispositif du t l viseur de fa on s re Classement de la liste des films ll est possible de classer les films dans la liste selon un crit re de classement particulier 1 Appuyez sur la touche MEDIA P 2 Appuyez sur la touche lt ou pour choisir Movie puis sur ENTER C 3 Appuyez
234. ous pouvez remplacer tous les param tres d image par les valeurs par d faut Fran ais 22 Luminosit R glage Auto cran R glages avanc s Options d image R initialisation de l image Grain Affin Position de l ordinateur R tablir l image D p C Intro 9 Retour Vous pouvez choisir les r glages pour le mode sonore le volume les options sonores multipistes etc ia Configuration du menu Son Q Mode Standard Musique Cin ma Voix claire Personnel A Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils Il est galement possible de r gler le son en choisissant Outils Son Mode ce Standard Choisit le mode sonore normal SRS TruSurround HD Off Musique Accentue la musique par rapport aux dialogues Multi Track Sound Mono Cin ma Offre le meilleur son pour les films nati at Voix claire Accentue les dialogues par rapport aux autres sons Personnel R tablit les r glages sonores personnalis s Mode Personnel gt S lect le haut parleur Haut parleur TV Q galiseur Vous pouvez r gler les param tres audio selon vos pr f rences personnelles e Mode Choisit le mode sonore parmi des r glages pr d finis e Balance G D R gle la balance entre les haut parleurs droit et gauche e 100Hz 300Hz 1KHz 3KHz 10KHz R glage de la largeur de bande Pour r gler le niveau des diff rentes fr quences de largeur de bande e R gler Ram ne tous les r glages d
235. ous titres Q Information L information du fichier film s affiche Q Supp s curit ll est possible de retirer le dispositif du t l viseur de fa on s re Fran ais 53 al Utilisation du menu Setup Le menu Setup affiche les param tres du menu Media Play 1 Appuyez sur la touche MEDIA P 2 Appuyez sur la touche lt ou pour choisir Setup puis sur ENTER C 3 Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour s lectionner l option d sir e 4 Appuyez sur la touche lt ou pour s lectionner l option d sir e Pour quitter le mode Media Play appuyez sur la touche MEDIA P de la si A D 6 t l commande Photo Music Movie Setup SENSUM Apparel Quitter Utiliser l aff Couleur On Off Vous pouvez choisir de classer les photos par couleur Si vous activez cette option On la dur e de chargement peut tre augment e par la recherche de l information sur la SRE ER Gale Rappel lecture cont Film couleur des photos Get DivX VOD registration code Get DivX VOD deactivation code Rappel lecture cont Film On Off Tps fot cran veille S lectionnez cette fonction pour afficher le message clair d aide pour la lecture de film ne A upp s curit en continu le temps de charge augmente pour Obtenir code enreg vid o s dem DivX rec i Affiche le code d enregistrement autoris pour le t l viseur Branchez vous sur le ee Saiti oi site Web DivX et enregistrez votre code dans un compte personnel pour t l c
236. patible with all external devices Film Mode Off Auto1 Auto2 The TV can be set to automatically sense and process film signals from all sources and adjust the picture for optimum quality Film Mode is supported in TV Video Component 480i 1080i and HDMI 480i 1080i e Off Turns the Film Mode function off e Auto1 Automatically adjusts the picture for the best quality when watching a film e Auto2 Automatically optimizes the video text on the screen not including closed captions when watching a film Blue Only Mode Off On This function is for AV device measurement experts This function displays the blue signal only by removing the red and green signals from the video signal so as to provide a Blue Filter effect that is used to adjust the color and Tint of video equipment such as DVD players Home Theaters etc Using this function you can adjust the color and Tint to preferred values appropriate to the signal level of each video device using the Red Green Blue Cyan Magenta Yellow color Bar Patterns without using an additional Blue Filter Blue Only Mode is available when the picture mode is set to Movie or Standard Auto Motion Plus 120Hz Off Clear Standard Smooth Custom Demo Removes drag from fast scenes with a lot of movement to provide a clearer picture If you enable Auto Motion Plus 120Hz noise may appear on the screen If this occurs set Auto Motion Plus 120Hz to Off Off Switches A
237. prior to 28 March 2007 Nothing in this License shall be construed as excluding or limiting any implied license or other defenses to infringement that may otherwise be available to you under applicable patent law No Surrender of Others Freedom If conditions are imposed on you whether by court order agreement or otherwise that contradict the conditions of this License they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License If you cannot convey a covered work so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations then as a consequence you may not convey it at all For example if you agree to terms that obligate you to collect a royalty for further conveying from those to whom you convey the Program the only way you could satisfy both those terms and this License would be to refrain entirely from conveying the Program Use with the GNU Affero General Public License Notwithstanding any other provision of this License you have permission to link or combine any covered work with a work licensed under version 3 of the GNU Affero General Public License into a single combined work and to convey the resulting work The terms of this License will continue to apply to the part which is the covered work but the special requirements of the GNU Affero General Public License section 13 concerning interaction through a network will apply to the combination as such Revised Versions of this License
238. r Pour e fixer d autres mat riaux veuillez communiquer avec votre d taillant Si vous installez au plafond ou sur un mur inclin il risque de tomber et de causer des blessures 2 2 2 B cs Les dimensions standard pour les ensembles de fixation murale figurent dans le tableau ci dessus Un manuel d installation d taill et toutes les pi ces n cessaires a l assemblage sont comprises l achat de notre ensemble d installation murale N utilisez pas de vis plus longues que les dimensions standard elles pourraient endommager l int rieur du t l viseur En ce qui a trait aux supports muraux non conformes aux sp cifications de vis de la norme VESA la longueur des vis peut diff rer selon leurs sp cifications N utilisez pas de vis non conformes aux sp cifications de vis de la norme VESA Ne serrez pas trop les vis cela pourrait endommager le produit ou provoquer sa chute et causer des blessures Samsung d cline toute responsabilit eu gard de tels accidents Samsung ne saurait tre tenu responsable des dommages au produit ou des blessures occasionn s par l utilisation d un support mural non conforme aux sp cifications VESA ou non recommand ou si le consommateur ne suit pas les instructions d installation du produit Nos mod les de 145 cm 57 po et 160 cm 63 po ne sont pas conformes aux sp cifications VESA Par cons quent vous devez utiliser notre ensemble de fixation con u pour ce
239. r les films en fonction de la classification MPAA La Motion Picture Classif MPAA Association of America MPAA a tabli un syst me de classification qui fournit aux parents ou adultes exer ant une surveillance des renseignements sur les films convenant aux enfants Bee ee Perm tout G Tout public aucune restriction PG Surveillance parentale recommand e PG 13 Parents vivement mis en garde R Avec restriction Les enfants de moins de 17 ans doivent tre sous la surveillance d un adulte NC 17 Aucun enfant de moins de 17 ans X Adultes uniquement NR Pas de classification La fonction V Chip bloque automatiquement toutes les cat gories qui sont plus restrictives Par exemple si vous bloquez la cat gorie PG 13 les cat gories R NC 17 et X seront automatiquement bloqu es Bloq tout D pl C Intro Retour Anglais canadien SAR EE C missions destin es aux enfants de moins de 8 ans C8 missions convenant g n ralement aux enfants de 8 ans et plus sans surveillance G missions grand public convenant tous les auditoires PG missions surveillance parentale 14 missions dont la teneur peut ne pas convenir en tout ou en partie aux enfants de moins de 14 ans 18 missions pour adultes La fonction V Chip bloque automatiquement toutes les cat gories qui sont plus restrictives Par exemple si vous bloquez la cat gorie G les cat gories PG 14
240. r modify any covered work These actions infringe copyright if you do not accept this License Therefore by modifying or propagating a covered work you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so Automatic Licensing of Downstream Recipients Each time you convey a covered work the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensors to run modify and propagate that work subject to this License You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License An entity transaction is a transaction transferring control of an organization or substantially all assets of one or subdividing an organization or merging organizations If propagation of a covered work results from an entity transaction each party to that transaction who receives a copy of the work also receives whatever licenses to the work the party s predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License For example you may not impose a license fee royalty or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License and you may not initiate litigation including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit alleging that any patent claim
241. ration of a music file may be displayed as 00 00 00 if its playing time information is not found at the start of the file lt lt REW or gt gt FF buttons do not function during play usic Play Control Buttons Se 6 D BB Z Button Operations ENTERC Play Pause the music file gt Play the music file il Pause the music file Exit play mode and return to the music list TOOLS Run various functions from the Music menus Music function information icon a When all music files in the folder or the selected file are repeated Repeat Mode is On Q When all music files in the folder or the selected file are played once Repeat Mode is Off Playing the music group 1 Press the A button to move to the Sort key Section 2 Press the lt or button to select a sorting standard 3 Press the Y or ENTER 4 button to move to the Group List Section 4 Press the gt Play button The files of the selected group will start playing Alternatively 1 Select a sort key and then in the File List Section select the files contained in the desired group To move to the previous next group press the lt lt REW or gt gt FF button Press the TOOLS button Press the A or Y button to select Play Current Group then press the ENTER button The music files in the sorting group including the selected file are
242. receiver Set Top Box directly to an Amplifier or Home Theater not the TV English 11 I O d EX LINK AUDIO OUT Q auno o LE EX LINK Connector for service only AUDIO OUT Connects to the audio input jacks on your Amplifier Home theater When an audio amplifier is connected to the AUDIO OUT R AUDIO L jacks Decrease the volume of the TV and adjust the volume level with the Amplifier s volume control LAN Connect a LAN cable to this port to connect to the Network Side Panel For devices frequently connected disconnected from your TV it is convenient to use the jacks on the side of your TV e g Camcorder 7 asn USB1 HDD USB2 Connector for software upgrades and Media Play etc You can connect to Samsung s network wirelessly using the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter Sold separately For USB HDD use the USB1 HDD port HDMIIN4 Connect to the HDMI jack of a device with HDMI output AV IN 2 VIDEO R AUDIO L Video and audio inputs for external devices such as a camcorder or VCR English 12 CHANNEL You can configure various settings for your TV channels with features such as Auto Program Favorite Channels and Signal Strength a Channel Menu Q Antenna Air Cable Before your tel
243. rent DivX VOD registration is deactivated If this is set to ON the loading time increas cting the Color inform em SUM Device Move 4p Adjust D Return Screen Saver Run Time 4 hours 8 hours 10 hours Select to set the waiting time before the screen saver appears Information Select to viewing the information of the connected device Safe Remove You can remove the device safely from the TV English 54 ANYNET la Connecting Anynet Devices What is Anynet Anynett is a function that enables you to control all connected Samsung devices that support Anynet with your Samsung TV s remote The Anynet system can be used only with Samsung devices that have the Anynet feature To be sure your Samsung device has this feature check if there is an Anynet logo on it To connect toa TV TV Anynet Device 1 Anynet Device 2 Anynet Device 3 Anynet Device 4 g 5 i RA n a a CS OS EES SS l H i HDMI OUT HDMI OUT HDMI OUT HDMI OUT ic Mananaanennesnbasanaaaaan SRE Lac HDMI 1 3 Cable HDMI 1 3 Cable HDMI 1 3 Cable HDMI 1 3 Cable f Connect the HDMI IN 1 DVI 2 3 or 4 jack on the TV and the HDMI OUT jack of the corresponding Anynet device using an HDMI cable To connect to Home Theater
244. rently selected device name Press the Red button to select a device e Red Device button Selects a connected device Help Items e Green Favorites Setting button Changes the Favorites Setting for the selected file Press this button repeatedly until the desired value appears e Yellow Select button Selects file from the file list Selected files are marked with a symbol w Press the Yellow button again to cancel a file selection e TOOLS Tools button Displays the option menus The option menu changes according to the current status Item Selection Information Shows the number of files that are selected by pressing the Yellow button English 40 Sorting the Photo List m You can sort photos in the Photo List by a particular standard 1 Press the MEDIA P button 2 Press the lt or gt button to select Photo then press the ENTER C amp button 3 Press the A button to move to the Sort key Section 4 Press the lt or button to select a sorting standard Basic View Timeline Color Folder Preference The photos are sorted according to the newly selected sorting standard 5 Press the Y button to move to the File List Section Press the gt Play ue Dose are wes Re ENTERC amp button to start the Slide Show in the order you selected To move to the previous next group press the lt lt REW or gt gt FF button Photo information is automatically set The Color infor
245. riate copyright notice keep intact all notices stating that this License and any non permissive terms added in accord with section 7 apply to the code keep intact all notices of the absence of any warranty and give all recipients a copy of this License along with the Program You may charge any price or no price for each copy that you convey and you may offer support or warranty protection for a fee Conveying Modified Source Versions You may convey a work based on the Program or the modifications to produce it from the Program in the form of source code under the terms of section 4 provided that you also meet all of these conditions a The work must carry prominent notices stating that you modified it and giving a relevant date b The work must carry prominent notices stating that it is released under this License and any conditions added under section 7 This requirement modifies the requirement in section 4 to keep intact all notices c You must license the entire work as a whole under this License to anyone who comes into possession of a copy This License will therefore apply along with any applicable section 7 additional terms to the whole of the work and all its parts regardless of how they are packaged This License gives no permission to license the work in any other way but it does not invalidate such permission if you have separately received it d If the work has interactive user interfaces each
246. rmation is automatically set You can change the preference Q Basic View Shows the folders of the USB memory device If you select a folder and press the ENTER C amp button only the movie files contained in the selected folder are displayed When sorted according to the Basic View you cannot set Favorite files Q Timeline Sorts movies by date It sorts by year and month from the earliest movie Q Title Sorts and displays the movie titles in symbol number alphabet special order Q Folder If there are many folders in USB the movies files are shown in order in each folder The movie file in the Root folder is shown first and the others are shown in alphabetical order by name Q Preference gt ie SE 0 0 Sorts movies by preference Favorite You can change the movie preferences Changing the Favorites Setting Select the desired movie file in the File List Section then press the Green button repeatedly until the desired setting appears Up to 3 stars can be selected The stars are for grouping purposes only For example the 3 star setting does not have any priority over the one star setting English 49 i Movie List Option Menu 1 Press the MEDIA P button 2 Press the lt or gt button to select Movie then press the ENTER C4 button Press the lt or button to select the desired Movie file Selecting Multiple Movie Files se Information Press the or button to select the desired movi
247. s 28 29 R glage du r seau Sous titres Q Mode Jeu Off On En branchant une console de jeu comme une PlayStation ou une Xbox vous pouvez vivre une exp rience de jeu plus r aliste en s lectionnant le menu jeu Restrictions en mode Jeu attention Pour d brancher la console de jeu et brancher un autre appareil externe d sactivez le mode Jeu dans le menu de configuration Si vous affichez le menu TV en mode Jeu l cran tremblera l g rement Mode Jeu n est pas disponible en mode TV et PC standard Lorsque la fonction ISI est activ e la fonction Mode Jeu ne peut pas tre utilis e Si la qualit de l image est mauvaise lorsqu un dispositif externe est branch au t l viseur v rifier si le Mode Jeu est On D finissez le Mode Jeu sur Off et connectez des p riph riques externes Si le Mode Jeu est sur marche Le mode image passe automatiquement Standard et il ne peut pas tre chang Le mode sonore passe automatiquement Personnel et il ne peut pas tre chang R glez le son l aide de l galiseur La fonction R initialisation du son est activ e Le fait de choisir la fonction de r initialisation apr s avoir param tr l galiseur le ram ne aux valeurs par d faut S Q BD Wise Off On Cette option offre une qualit d image optimale pour les produits Samsung DVD Blu ray et chaines de cin ma maison prenant en charge BD Wise En les branchant au t l viseur Sa
248. s governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions 10 11 When you convey a copy of a covered work you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy or from any part of it Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work You may place additional permissions on material added by you to a covered work for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission Notwithstanding any other provision of this License for material you add to a covered work you may if authorized by the copyright holders of that material supplement the terms of this License with terms a Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License or b Requiring preservation of specified reasonable legal notices or author attributions in that material or in the Appropriate Legal Notices displayed by works containing it or c Prohibiting misrepresentation of the origin of that material or requiring that modified versions of such material be marked in reasonable ways as different from the original version or d Limiting the use for publicity purposes of names of licensors or authors of the material or e Declining to grant rights under trademark law for use of some trade names trademarks or service marks or f Requiring indemnification of licensors and authors of that mat
249. s is fundamentally incompatible with the aim of protecting users freedom to change the software The systematic pattern of such abuse occurs in the area of products for individuals to use which is precisely where it is most unacceptable Therefore we have designed this version of the GPL to prohibit the practice for those products If such problems arise substantially in other domains we stand ready to extend this provision to those domains in future versions of the GPL as needed to protect the freedom of users Finally every program is threatened constantly by software patents States should not allow patents to restrict development and use of software on general purpose computers but in those that do we wish to avoid the special danger that patents applied to a free program could make it effectively proprietary To prevent this the GPL assures that patents cannot be used to render the program non free The precise terms and conditions for copying distribution and modification follow TERMS AND CONDITIONS 0 Definitions This License refers to version 3 of the GNU General Public License Copyright also means copyright like laws that apply to other kinds of works such as semiconductor masks The Program refers to any copyrightable work licensed under this License Each licensee is addressed as you Licensees and recipients may be individuals or organizations To modify a work means to copy from or ad
250. s mod les 4 Au montage l inclinaison du t l viseur ne doit pas d passer 15 degr s Type de produits pouces Sp c VESA A B Vis standard Quantit 19 22 100 X 100 M4 23 29 200 X 100 30 40 200 X 200 M6 LCD TV 4 46 55 400 X 400 57 70 800 X 400 M8 80 1400 X 800 42 50 400 X 400 58 63 600 X 400 PDP TV M8 4 70 800 X 400 80 1400 X 800 30 39 200 X 200 M6 40 52 400 X 400 LFD 4 55 70 800 X 400 M8 70 1400 X 800 A N installez pas l ensemble d installation murale lorsque le t l viseur est en fonctionnement Une blessure par choc lectrique pourrait en r sulter Fran ais 64 il Utilisation du verrou antivol Kensington La couleur et la forme du produit peuvent varier en fonction du mod le Le verrou Kensington est un dispositif permettant de fixer physiquement un systeme utilis un endroit public L apparence et le mode de verrouillage peuvent tre diff rents de ceux illustr s selon le fabricant Veuillez consulter le manuel fourni avec le verrou Kensington pour sa bonne utilisation Le verrou doit tre achet s par ment amp L emplacement du verrou Kensington peut varier en fonction du mod le 1 Ins rez le dispositif de verrouillage dans la fente Kensington du t l viseur ACL et tournez le dans le sens de verrouillage Branchez le c ble du verrou Kensington Fixez le verrou Kensi
251. s only available for devices that support the recording function Stop Recording recorder Stops recording Receiver Sound is played through the receiver device_name MENU device_name INFO Recording recorder amp If more than one recording device is connected they are displayed as recorder and if only one recording device is connected it will be represented as device_name English 56 TV Remote Control Buttons Available in Anynet Mode Device Type Operating Status Available Buttons After switching to the device when the menu Numeric buttons of the corresponding device is displayed on A Y lt gt ENTER CS buttons Anynet Device the screen Color buttons EXIT button After switching to the device while playing a lt lt Backward search gt gt Forward search file m Stop gt Play u Pause Device with built in After switching to the device when you are Tuner watching a TV program V CH A button Audio Device When Receiver is activated VOL MUTE button amp The Anynet function only works when the active source on the TV remote control is set to TV amp The Le button works only while in the recordable state You cannot control Anynet devices using the buttons on the TV You can control Anynett devices only using the TV remote control The TV remote control may no
252. seRIES 6 630 Contact SAMSUNG WORLDWIDE If you have any questions or comments relating to Samsung products please contact the SAMSUNG customer care center 6 JA O Comment contacter Samsung dans le monde 6 5 O Si vous avez des suggestions ou des questions concernant les produits Samsung veuillez contacter le Service Consommateurs Samsung Country Customer Care Center Web Site Address Samsung Electronics Canada Inc Customer Service 55 Standish Court Mississauga Ontario L5R 4B2 Canada Samsung Electronique Canada Inc Service la Client le 55 Standish Court Mississauga Ontario L5R 4B2 Canada Samsung Electronics America Inc U S A 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com us 105 Challenger Road Ridgefield Park NJ 07660 0511 CANADA 1 800 SAMSUNG 726 7864 www samsung com ca imagine the possibilities Thank you for purchasing this Samsung product To receive more complete service please register your product at www samsung com register 9 4 BN68 02089B 00 Q Important Warranty Information Regarding Television Format Viewing See the warranty card for more information on warranty terms Wide screen format LCD Displays 16 9 the aspect ratio of the screen width to height are primarily designed to view wide screen format full motion video The images displayed on them should primarily be in the wide screen 16 9 ratio format or expanded to fill the screen if your model offers this feat
253. seur met des signaux num riques air il transmet le son en 5 1 canaux au r cepteur de la cha ne de cin ma maison Lorsque la source est un composant num rique comme un lecteur DVD et que ce dernier est branch au t l viseur l aide d un cable HDMI seul un son deux canaux est mis par le r cepteur de la cha ne de cin ma maison amp S il y a une interruption de l alimentation au t l viseur lorsque la fonction R cepteur est r gl e Marche si le cordon d alimentation est d branch ou en cas de panne de courant la fonction S lect le haut parleur peut tre r gl e Haut p externe lorsque vous remettez le t l viseur sous tension Liste appareils Enregistrer DVDR D DVORMENU o gt e DVDR INFO R cepteur Arr t Configuration D p C intro D Retour Aynet Regarder t l viseur Liste appareils Enregistrer DVDR DVDR MENU DVDR INFO R cepteur Arr t Configuration D p CH Intro D Retour Frangais 57 a D pannage de la fonction Anynett Probl me Solution possible Anynet ne fonctionne pas e V rifier si l appareil est bien un appareil Anynet Le syst me Anynet ne prend en charge que les appareils Anynet e Ne brancher qu un seul r cepteur cha ne de cin ma maison e V rifier si le cordon d alimentation de l appareil Anynett est correctement branch e V rifier les branchements des c bles vid o au
254. sions L x P x H Sans support Avec support 40 9 x 3 1 x 25 1 po 1040 0 x 79 3 x 638 0 mm 40 9 x 10 0 x 27 4 po 1040 0 x 253 0 x 695 4 mm Poids Sans support Avec support 31 4 Ib 15 6 Kg 42 8 lb 19 4 Kg Facteurs environnementaux Temp rature de fonctionnement Niveau d humidit durant le fonctionnement Temp rature pour l entreposage Niveau d humidit pour l entreposage Support pivotant Gauche Droite 50 F 104 F 10 C 40 C 10 80 sans condensation 4 F 113 F 20 C 45 C 5 95 sans condensation 20 20 Frangais 69 Mod le LN46B640 Taille de l cran 46 pouces diagonale 46 0 pouces en diagonale R solution PC Optimale 1920 x 1080 60 Hz Son Sortie 10W x 2 Dimensions L x P x H Sans support 46 1 x 3 1 x 28 0 po 1172 0 x 79 3 x 711 5 mm Avec support 46 1 x 10 9 x 30 4 po 1172 0 x 277 0 x 771 4 mm Poids Sans support Avec support 43 4 lb 19 7 Kg 53 8 Ib 24 4 Kg Facteurs environnementaux Temp rature de fonctionnement Niveau d humidit durant le fonctionnement Temp rature pour l entreposage Niveau d humidit pour l entreposage 50 F 104 F 10 C 40 C 10 80 sans condensation 4 F 113 F 20 C 45 C 5 95 sans condensation Support pivotant Gauche Droite 20 20 Mod le LN55B640 Taille de l cran 55 pouces diagonale 5
255. sions for wall mount kits are shown in the table above amp When purchasing our wall mount kit a detailed installation manual and all parts necessary for assembly are provided Do not use screws longer than the standard dimension as they may cause damage to the inside of the TV set For wall mounts that do not comply with the VESA standard screw specifications the length of the screws may differ depending on their specifications amp Do not use screws that do not comply with the VESA standard screw specifications Do not fasten the screws too strongly this may damage the product or cause the product to fall leading to personal injury Samsung is not liable for these kinds of accidents Samsung is not liable for product damage or personal injury when a non VESA or non specified wall mount is used or the consumer fails to follow the product installation instructions Our 57 and 63 models do not comply with VESA Specifications Therefore you should use our dedicated wall mount kit for this model Do not exceed 15 degrees tilt when mounting this TV Product Family inches VESA Spec A B Standard Screw Quantity 19 22 100 X 100 M4 23 29 200 X 100 30 40 200 X 200 M6 LCD TV 4 46 55 400 X 400 57 70 800 X 400 M8 80 1400 X 800 42 50 400 X 400 58 63 600 X 400 PDP TV M8 4 70 800 X 400 80 1400 X 800 30 39 200 X 200 M6 40 52 400 X 400 LFD 4 55 70 800 X 400 M8 70 1400 X 800 AN Do not install your Wall Mo
256. sions r serv es S lectionnez un canal dans la liste Tous les canaux Canaux ajout s ou Favori en appuyant sur les touches A Y puis sur ENTER 4 Vous pouvez alors visionner le canal s lectionn amp Utilisation des touches de couleur avec la Liste des canaux Rouge Antenne Permet de permuter entre Air et Cable Verte Zoom Agrandit ou r duit un num ro de canal Jaune Choisir S lectionne plusieurs listes de canaux Dans la fonction Favorite vous pouvez ex cuter en m me temps les fonctions Ajouter supprimer ou Ajouter aux favoris Effacer des favoris pour plusieurs canaux S lectionnez les canaux d sir s Appuyez ensuite sur la touche jaune pour r gler simultan ment tous les canaux choisis Le symbole YW s affiche la gauche des canaux s lectionn s TOOLS Outils Affiche les menus Ajouter ou Supprimer Ajouter aux favoris ou Effacer des favoris coute par minuterie Modifier le nom du canal Choisir tout ou D s lect tout et Prog auto les menus d options peuvent diff rer selon le cas Ic nes d affichage de statut des canaux v Un canal s lectionn l aide de la touche jaune Une mission en cours de diffusion Un canal d fini en tant que favori Une mission r serv e Menu d options des listes de canaux sous Tous les canaux Canaux ajout s et Favori Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS pour utiliser le menu d options Les options du menu pe
257. sorting standard Press the Y button to move to the Group List Section Select a group using the lt and gt buttons Press the gt Play button A slideshow begins with the files of the selected group J SR 6 D Alternatively Select a Sort key and then in the File List Section select the photos contained in the desired group To move to the previous next group press the lt lt REW or gt gt FF button Press the TOOLS button Press the A or Y button to select Play Current Group then press the ENTER button Only the photos in the sorting group including the selected files will be used for the Slide Show 0 English 43 To perform a Slide Show with only the selected files 1 Press the Y button to select the File List Section 2 Press the lt or gt button to select the desired photo in the File List Section 3 Press the Yellow button 4 Repeat the above operation to select multiple photos The Y mark appears to the left of the selected photo Ifyou select one file the Slide Show will not be performed To deselect all selected files press the TOOLS button and select Deselect All 5 Press the gt Play ENTER C button amp The selected files will be used for the Slide Show Alternatively n the File List Section press the Yellow button to select the desired photos Press the TOOLS button Press the A or Y button to select Slide Show the
258. ss Color Tint G R Your television has several setting options that allow you to control the picture quality 7 Backlight Adjusts the brightness of LCD back light Backlight 7 Contrast Adjusts the contrast level of the picture i Brightness Adjusts the brightness level of the picture Sharpness Adjusts the edge definition of the picture Color Adjusts color saturation of the picture Tint G R Adjusts the color tint of the picture When you make changes to Backlight Contrast Brightness Sharpness Color or Tint G R the OSD will be adjusted accordingly In PC mode you can only make changes to Backlight Contrast and Brightness Settings can be adjusted and stored for each external device you have connected to an input of the TV The energy consumed during use can be significantly reduced if the brightness level of the picture is lowered which will reduce the overall running cost Move 4b Adjust C Enter 9 Return AS S ee s9 Q Advanced Settings Samsung s new TVs allow you to make even more precise picture settings than previous Advanced Settings models Advanced Settings is available in Standard or Movie mode r a ja 0 In PC mode you can only make changes to Dynamic Contrast Gamma and White a Native Balance from among the Advanced Settings items Mo Flesh Tone 0 Edge Enhancement On Black Tone Off Dark Darker Darkest You can select the black level on the screen to adjust the screen depth Move
259. ssai de son dans le menu Autodiagnostic La t l vision fonctionne irr guli rement D branchez la t l vision pendant 30 secondes puis essayez de nouveau Le t l viseur ne s allume pas V rifiez que la prise lectrique fonctionne correctement La t l commande ne fonctionne pas Remplacez les piles de la t l commande Nettoyez la partie sup rieure de la t l commande fen tre de transmission V rifiez les bornes de la batterie Message V rifier signal c ble Assurez vous que le c ble d interface est solidement branch aux sources PC Message Mode non disponible V rifiez la r solution maximale et la fr quence vid o de l appareil branch Comparez ces valeurs aux donn es des modes d affichage Probl me d cran en t l diffusion num rique V rifiez la puissance du signal num rique et l entr e de l antenne L image est trop claire ou trop sombre R glez la luminosit et le contraste Utilisez la fonction de r glage fin Barres noires a l cran Assurez vous que votre r ception est en haute d finition HD Les stations des canaux a haute d finition mettent parfois en signaux a d finition standard SD ce qui peut causer la formation de barres noires R glez votre c blos lecteur ou r cepteur satellite sur le mode tirer ou format large pour liminer les barres L image a une teinte rouge verte ou rose Assurez vous que
260. stomized sound settings Custom Q Equalizer The sound settings can be adjusted to suit your personal preference e Mode Selects the sound mode among the predefined settings e Balance L R Adjusts the balance between the right and left speaker e 100Hz 300Hz 1KHz 3KHz 10KHz Bandwidth Adjustment To adjust the level of different bandwidth frequencies e Reset Resets the equalizer settings to the default values Q SRS TruSurround HD Off On SRS TruSurround HD is a patented SRS technology that solves the problem of playing 5 1 multichannel content over two speakers TruSurround delivers a compelling virtual surround sound experience through any two speaker playback system including internal television speakers It is fully compatible with all multichannel formats A Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu You can also set the SRS TruSurround HD by selecting Tools SRS TS HD Q Preferred Language digital channels only Digital TV broadcasts are capable of simultaneous transmission of many audio tracks for example simultaneous translations of the program into foreign languages You can listen in a language other than the Preferred Language by pressing the MTS button on the remote control Preferred Language is available only in Digital TV mode You can only select the language from among the actual languages being broadcast Q Multi Track Sound MTS analog channels only Press the MTS button on
261. t sur un m dia une toile Fran ais 46 il Options du menu Liste de fichiers musicaux Appuyez sur la touche MEDIA P Appuyez sur la touche lt ou gt pour choisir Music puis sur ENTER C4 Appuyez sur la touche lt ou pour s lectionner le fichier musical d sir S lection de plusieurs fichiers musicaux Appuyez sur la touche lt ou pour choisir le fichier musical d sir Appuyez ensuite sur la touche jaune R p ter l tape pr c dente pour s lectionner plusieurs fichiers musicaux Le symbole Y s affiche c t du fichier musical s lectionn 4 Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS Les options de menu varient selon l tat actuel S D D Lire groupe courant Ce menu permet de lire des fichiers musicaux du groupe de classement choisi D Mod info groupe lorsque la cl de tri est Ambiance ll est possible de modifier l information d ambiance des fichiers musicaux L information de groupe du fichier actuel est mise jour et le fichier est d plac dans le nouveau groupe Pour modifier l information de plusieurs fichiers s lectionnez les fichiers d sir s l aide de la touche jaune Q D s lect tout quand au moins un fichier est s lectionn Vous pouvez d s lectionner tous les fichiers Le symbole Y indiquant que le fichier correspondant est s lectionn dispara t Q Information L information du fichier musical notamment le nom la taille la date de modificati
262. t but changing it is not allowed Preamble The GNU General Public License is a free copyleft license for software and other kinds of works The licenses for most software and other practical works are designed to take away your freedom to share and change the works By contrast the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change all versions of a program to make sure it remains free software for all its users We the Free Software Foundation use the GNU General Public License for most of our software it applies also to any other work released this way by its authors You can apply it to your programs too When we speak of free software we are referring to freedom not price Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software and charge for them if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights Therefore you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it responsibilities to respect the freedom of others For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms
263. t le haut parleur les r glages du son seront limit s 5 S Haut parleurs internes du t l viseur Sortie audio optique sortie G D vers la cha ne audio RF AV Composante PC HDMI RF AV Composante PC HDMI Haut parleur TV Sortie du son Sortie du son Haut p externe Sourdine Sortie du son Aucun signal vid o Sourdine Sourdine QO S lect son Principale Secondaire Lorsque la fonction ISI est activ e vous pouvez couter le son de l image ISI secondaire Vous pouvez s lectionner cette option lorsque la fonction ISI est r gl e On A Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils Vous pouvez r gler le son de l image secondaire en choisissant Outils ISI S lect son Q R initialisation du son R initial tout R init mode son Effacer R initialisation du son Vous pouvez r tablir les param tres audio par d faut R init mode son Les valeurs de son actuelles sont ramen es aux r glages par d faut Choisir les options de r tablissement du son 4 gt D pl C Intro D Retour Frangais 24 CONFIGURATION Vous pouvez r gler des fonctions suppl mentaires ia Configuration du menu de configuration Q Langue Vous pouvez r gler la langue de menu meavenn Langue Fran ais Q Heure Heure Pour les proc dures d taill es concernant les options de configuration veuillez consulter les instructions R glage de l horloge voir page
264. t separately Install the TV close to the wall so that it does not fall When attaching the TV to the wall tie the cord level with the ground or slanted downwards for safety purposes Confirm that the cord or link does not come loose Before moving the TV separate the connected cord first gt cabinet cabinet 3 Verify all connections are properly secured Periodically check connections for any sign of fatigue or failure If you have any doubt about the security of your connections contact a professional installer English 66 F Specifications Model Name LN32B650 Screen Size 32 inches Diagonal 31 6 inches measured diagonally PC Resolution Optimum 1920 x 1080 60 Hz Sound Output 10W x 2 Dimensions WxDxH Body 31 6 x 3 0 x 21 5 inch 802 9 x 77 1 x 544 9 mm With stand 31 6 x 9 4 x 23 7 inch 802 9 x 239 0 x 601 0 mm Weight Without Stand 23 8 lbs 10 8 Kg With Stand 31 1 lbs 14 1 Kg Environmental Considerations Operating Temperature 10 C to 40 C 50 F to 104 F Operating Humidity 10 to 80 non condensing Storage Temperature 20 C to 45 C 4 F to 113 F Storage Humidity 5 to 95 non condensing Stand Swivel Left Right 20 20 Model Name LN37B650 Screen Size 37 inches Diagonal 37 1 inches measured diagonally PC Resolution Optimum 1920 x 1080 60 Hz Sound
265. t to be of the greatest possible use to the public the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms To do so attach the following notices to the program It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively state the exclusion of warranty and each file should have at least the copyright line and a pointer to where the full notice is found lt one line to give the program s name and a brief idea of what it does gt Copyright C lt year gt lt name of author gt This program is free software you can redistribute it and or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 3 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program If not see lt http www gnu org licenses gt Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail If the program does terminal interaction make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode lt program gt Copyright C lt year gt lt name of author gt This program comes with ABSOLUTE
266. t work under certain conditions If this occurs reselect the Anynett device amp The Anynet functions do not operate with other manufacturers products The lt lt gt gt operations may differ depending on the device il Recording You can make a recording of a TV program using a Samsung recorder 1 Press the TOOLS button Press the ENTER C4 button to select Anynett HDMI CEC 2 Press the A or Y button to select Recording Immediately and press the ENTERL ee CONS button Recording begins DDR MEN a DVDR INFO When there is more than one recording device Receiver Off Setup When multiple recording devices are connected the recording devices are listed Press the A or Y button to select a recording device and press the ENTER Ce button Recording begins When the recording device is not displayed select Device List and press the Red button to search devices 3 Press the EXIT button to exit You can record the source streams by selecting Recording device_name Pressing the button will record whatever you are currently watching If you are watching video from another device the video from the device is recorded Before recording check whether the antenna jack is properly connected to the recording device To properly connect an antenna to a recording device refer to the recording device s users manual ij Listening through a Receiver Home Theater You can listen to soun
267. ter les nouvelles les plus r centes les cotes de la Bourse et la m t o a l aide du service InfoLink de SAMSUNG Pour de plus amples renseignements sur la configuration du r seau reportez vous a la section Configuration du r seau voir pages 30 35 Les renseignements fournis provenant du USA TODAY par l entremise du service InfoLink sont pour les Etats Unis seulement Aucune information pour les autres pays n est fournie WPF Infolink gt es Ed S Activation du service InfoLink 1 Appuyez sur la touche MENU pour afficher le menu Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour s lectionner Application puis sur ENTER C 2 Appuyez sur la touche A ou Y pour choisir InfoLink puis sur ENTER C 3 Appuyez sur la touche lt ou pour s lectionner un service M t o Nouvelles Actions ou Configuration puis sur ENTER C amp Appuyez sur la touche INFO L de la t l commande pour afficher le menu InfoLink al Utilisation de l objet Weather Service 1 Appuyez sur la touche INFO L de la t l commande 2 Appuyez sur la touche ou pour vous d placer sur le service M t o et appuyez sur ENTERC amp Configuration de la r gion 3 Appuyez sur la touche jaune Entrez le code zip aux tats Unis seulement de la r gion en appuyant sur les touches num rot es de la t l commande puis appuyez sur la touche ENTERC amp Vous pouvez consulter la m t o pour la r gion s lectionn e Configur
268. the Remote Control 1 Lift the cover at the back of the remote control upward as shown in the figure 2 Install two AAA size batteries A Make sure to match the and ends of the batteries with the diagram inside pa at the compartment CS o 3 Replace the cover lt j Remove the batteries and store them in a cool dry place if you won t be using the remote control for a long time Assuming typical TV usage the batteries should last for about one year If the remote control doesn t work check the following Is the TV power on Are the plus and minus ends of the batteries reversed Are the batteries drained Is there a power outage or is the power cord unplugged Is there a special fluorescent light or neon sign nearby D Viewing the menus Before using the TV follow the steps below to learn how to navigate the menu in order to select and adjust different functions Nol E GR MENU Button n Display the main on screen menu e Fave Q Operation the OSD On Screen Display The access step may differ depending on the selected menu RETURN Button G Return to the previous menu A EXIT ENTERC DIRECTION Button Move the cursor and select an item Select the currently selected item Confirm the setting Exit the on screen menu 1 Press the MENU button an ET ES RA 2 The main menu appears on the screen
269. the remote control repeatedly to select Mono Stereo or SAP e Mono Choose for channels that are broadcasting in mono or if you are having difficulty receiving a stereo signal e Stereo Choose for channels that are broadcasting in stereo e SAP Choose to listen to the Separate Audio Program which is usually a foreign language translation Multi Track Sound is available only in Analog TV mode Depending on the particular program being broadcast you can listen to Mono Stereo or SAP English 23 Q Auto Volume Off On Each broadcasting station has its own signal conditions and so it is not easy to adjust the volume every time the channel is changed This feature lets you automatically adjust the volume of the desired channel by lowering the sound output when the modulation signal is high or by raising the sound output when the modulation signal is low Q Speaker Select When you watch TV with it connecting to a Home theater turn the TV speakers off so you can listen to sound from the Home theater s external speakers External Speaker Used to listen to the sound of the External Home Theater Speakers TV Speaker Used to listen to the sound of the TV Speakers The volume and MUTE buttons do not operate when the Speaker Select is set to External Speaker Please set the volume on your Home theater If you select External Speaker in the Speaker Select menu the sound settings will be limited fee iS TV s Intern
270. the remote control to turn the Caption on or off The Caption feature doesn t work in Component HDMI or PC modes Caption Mode You can select the desired caption mode The availability of captions depends on the program being broadcast e Default CC1 CC4 Texti Text4 analog channels only The Analog Caption function operates in either analog TV channel mode or when a signal is supplied from an external device to TV Depending on the broadcasting signal the Analog Caption function may operate on digital channels e Default Service1 Service6 CC1 CC4 Text1 Text4 digital channels only The Digital Captions function operates on digital channels Service1 6 in digital caption mode may not be available depending on the broadcast Digital Caption Options digital channels only e Size This option consists of Default Small Standard and Large The default is Standard e Font Style This option consists of Default Style 0 Style 7 You can change the font you want The default is Style 0 e Foreground Color This option consists of Default White Black Red Green Blue Yellow Magenta and Cyan You can change the color of the letter The default is White e Background Color This option consists of Default White Black Red Green Blue Yellow Magenta and Cyan You can change the background color of the caption The default is Black e Foreground Opacity This option consists of Default Transparent Translucent Solid and Fl
271. the screws Applicable to models LN32B650 only 1 Attach your LCD TV to the stand amp Two or more people should carry the TV Make sure to distinguish between the front and back of the stand when attaching it To make sure the TV is installed on the stand at a proper level do not apply excess downward pressure to the upper left of right sides of the TV 2 Fasten screws at position and then fasten screws at position Stand the product up and fasten the screws If you fasten the screws with the LCD TV placed down it may lean to one side ij Disconnecting the Stand The product color and shape may vary depending on the model 1 Remove screws from the back of the TV 2 Separate the stand from the TV Two or more people should carry the TV 3 Cover the bottom hole with the cover English 63 Assembling the Cables Enclose the cables in the Holder Wire Cable so that the cables are not visible through the transparent stand amp The product color and shape may vary depending on the model Wall Mount Kit Specifications VESA Install your wall mount on a solid wall perpendicular to the floor When attaching to other building materials please contact your nearest dealer If installed on a ceiling or slanted wall it may fall and result in severe personal injury Standard dimen
272. ting screen problem Please check the digital signal strength and input antenna The image is too light or too dark Adjust the Brightness and Contrast Adjust the Fine tuning Black bars on the screen Make sure the broadcast you re receiving is High Definition HD HD channels sometimes broadcast Standard Definition SD programming which can cause black bars Set your cable satellite box to stretch or widescreen mode to eliminate the bars Picture has a Red Green or Pink tint Make sure the Component cables are connected to the correct jacks Closed Captioning not working Snowy picture If you are using a Cable Satellite box you must set Closed Captioning on the box not your TV Your cable box may need a firmware upgrade Please contact your Cable company Ghosting on picture This is sometimes caused by compatibility issues with your cable box Try connecting Component cables instead Horizontal bars appear to flicker jitter or shimmer on the image Adjust the Coarse tuning and then adjust the Fine tuning Vertical bars appear to flicker jitter or shimmer on the image Adjust the Coarse tuning and then adjust the Fine tuning Screen is black and power indicator light blinks steadily On your computer check Power Signal Cable The TV is using its power management system Move the computer s mouse or press any key on the keyboard English 62 Problem Im
273. to a covered work in accord with this section you must place in the relevant source files a statement of the additional terms that apply to those files or a notice indicating where to find the applicable terms Additional terms permissive or non permissive may be stated in the form of a separately written license or stated as exceptions the above requirements apply either way Termination You may not propagate or modify a covered work except as expressly provided under this License Any attempt otherwise to propagate or modify it is void and will automatically terminate your rights under this License including any patent licenses granted under the third paragraph of section 11 However if you cease all violation of this License then your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated a provisionally unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally terminates your license and b permanently if the copyright holder fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to 60 days after the cessation Moreover your license from a particular copyright holder is reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the violation by some reasonable means this is the first time you have received notice of violation of this License for any work from that copyright holder and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after your receipt of the notice Termination of your rights under this section
274. to make such an agreement or commitment not to enforce a patent against the party If you convey a covered work knowingly relying on a patent license and the Corresponding Source of the work is not available for anyone to copy free of charge and under the terms of this License through a publicly available network server or other readily accessible means then you must either 1 cause the Corresponding Source to be so available or 2 arrange to deprive yourself of the benefit of the patent license for this particular work or 3 arrange in a manner consistent with the requirements of this License to extend the patent license to downstream recipients Knowingly relying means you have actual knowledge that but for the patent license your conveying the covered work in a country or your recipient s use of the covered work in a country would infringe one or more identifiable patents in that country that you have reason to believe are valid If pursuant to or in connection with a single transaction or arrangement you convey or propagate by procuring conveyance of a covered work and grant a patent license to some of the parties receiving the covered work authorizing them to use propagate modify or convey a specific copy of the covered work then the patent license you grant is automatically extended to all recipients of the covered work and works based on it A patent license is discriminatory if it does not include within the scope o
275. tomber si vous le tirez ou le poussez ou si vous y grimpez Assurez vous que les enfants ne se pendent pas au dessus du t l viseur ou qu ils ne le d stabilisent pas le t l viseur pourrait basculer et causer des blessures graves ou la mort Suivez les consignes de s curit fournies dans le prospectus de s curit inclus Pour plus de stabilit installez le dispositif anti chute par mesure de s curit en suivant les tapes donn es ci dessous Composants Selon le mod le Support pour S t l viseur Vis M8xL16 Pour emp cher le t l viseur de tomber 1 Fixez le support pour t l viseur au t l viseur en serrant les vis M4XL16 dans les orifices au centre du t l viseur Assurez vous de n utilisez que les vis fournies armoire 2 Fixez solidement les vis au mur ou l armoire auquel sera install le t l viseur Fixez le support attach au t l viseur aux vis sur le mur ou armoire afin d installer le t l viseur Les vis utilis es au mur ou dans l armoire sont vendues s par ment Fixez le t l viseur pr s du mur pour ne pas qu il ne tombe Lorsque vous fixez le t l viseur au mur attachez le cordon de niveau avec le sol ou inclin vers le bas par mesure de s curit S Ss Assurez vous que le cordon ou le lien ne se d tache pas Avant de d placer le t l viseur d branchez d abord le cordon 5 5 arm
276. total Note that you can connect up to 3 devices of the same type English 55 E Setting Up Anynett A Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu You can also display Anynett menu re by selecting Tools gt Anynet HDMI CEC EREE M Anynet HDMI CEC uonearddy InfoLink Q Setup Anynett HDMI CEC Off On To use the Anynet Function Anynet HDMI CEC must be set to On When the Anynet HDMI CEC function is disabled all the Anynet related operations Pyne Setup are deactivated Anynet HDMI CEC Auto Turn Off Auto Turn Off No Yes Setting an Anynet Device to turn Off automatically when the TV is turned Off Aynet Sun The active source on the TV remote must be set to TV to use the Anynet function Ifyou set Auto Turn Off to Yes connected external devices are also turned off when the TV is turned off If an external device is still recording it may or may not turn off Anynet HDMI CEC Auto Turn Off Move Enter Return il Switching between Anynet Devices 1 Press the TOOLS button Press the ENTER C4 button to select Anynett HDMI CEC 2 Press the A or Y button to select Device List then press the ENTER L button Anynet devices connected to the TV are listed van If you cannot find a device you want press the red button to scan for devices Recording DVDR DVDR MENU 3 Press the A or Y button to select a particular device and press the ENTER L button It DVDR INFO
277. turer it may result in a problem with the product or fire due to an increase in the internal temperature of the product due to poor ventilation The appearance may differ depending on the product The product color and shape may vary depending on the model When installing the product with a stand When installing the product with a wall mount English 65 al Securing the TV to a Wall or Cabinet The product color and shape may vary depending on the model not hang over or destabilize the TV doing so may cause the TV to tip over causing serious injuries or death Follow all safety precautions provided on the included Safety Flyer For added stability install the anti fall device for safety purposes as follows A Caution Pulling pushing or climbing on the TV may cause the TV to fall In particular ensure your children do Components Depending on the model B TV Holder Y Screw M4XL16 G To prevent the TV from falling 1 Attach the TV Holder to the TV by fastening the screws M4XL16 into the holes in the center of the TV Make sure to only use the supplied screws cabinet 2 Firmly fasten the screws to the wall or cabinet where the TV is to be installed Tie the TV Holder attached to the TV and the screws fastened on the wall or cabinet so that the TV is fixed Purchase the screws to be used on the wall or cabine
278. twork Setup The menu is activated only if the Samsung Wireless LAN Adapter is connected e Internet Protocol Setup Auto Setup Manual Setup e Network Test You can test or confirm the network connection status after setting up the network English 33 When unable to connect to an AP Connecting WPS Wi Fi Protected Setup Your TV may fail to locate an AP that is configured as a private SSID type In this case please change the AP settings and try again If your Internet service provider has registered the MAC address of the device used to connect to the Internet for the first time and authenticates the MAC address each time you connect to the Internet your TV may not be able to connect to the Internet as the MAC address differs from that of the device PC In this case ask your Internet service provider about the procedures to connect devices other than your PC such as your TV to the Internet If you cannot connect to the Internet even if you have followed the procedures of your Internet service provider please contact a Samsung Electronics at 1 800 SAMSUNG Select a network Access Point You can select the IP sharer to use when using a wireless network amp Ifa wireless Access Point is not in the Access Point list press the Red button When the connection is made you will be returned to the screen automatically Wireless Network Setup amp If you have selected an Access Point with a security authentication Seek
279. u r seau a l aide du protocole DHCP Protocole de configuration de l h te dynamique sont d crites ci dessous Etant donn qu une adresse IP un masque de sous r seau une passerelle et le DNS sont attribu s automatiquement lorsque le protocole DHCP est s lectionn il n est pas n cessaire de les entrer manuellement 1 Branchez le port LAN du panneau arri re du t l viseur au modem externe l aide d un c ble LAN 2 Branchez le port modem mural et le modem externe l aide d un c ble modem Port modem mural Modem externe Panneau arri re du t l viseur ADSL VDSL c blodistribution Cable LAN Cable modem Vous pouvez relier le LAN par un routeur Port modem mural Modem externe ADSL VDSL cablodistribution Routeur IP SS p a S C ble LAN Panneau arri re du t l viseur x Len Cable modem Cable LAN Vous pouvez relier directement le port LAN au t l viseur selon l tat de votre r seau Port LAN mural Panneau arri re du t l viseur C ble LAN Les bornes le type de port et son emplacement de l appareil externe peuvent varier selon la marque Si l attribution de l adresse IP par le serveur DHCP a chou mettez le modem externe hors tension remettez le sous tension au bout de 10 secondes et r essayez Pour les connexions entre le modem externe et l
280. uct model to give anyone who possesses the object code either 1 a copy of the Corresponding Source for all the software in the product that is covered by this License on a durable physical medium customarily used for software interchange for a price no more than your reasonable cost of physically performing this conveying of source or 2 access to copy the Corresponding Source from a network server at no charge c Convey individual copies of the object code with a copy of the written offer to provide the Corresponding Source This alternative is allowed only occasionally and noncommercially and only if you received the object code with such an offer in accord with subsection 6b d Convey the object code by offering access from a designated place gratis or for a charge and offer equivalent access to the Corresponding Source in the same way through the same place at no further charge You need not require recipients to copy the Corresponding Source along with the object code If the place to copy the object code is a network server the Corresponding Source may be on a different server operated by you or a third party that supports equivalent copying facilities provided you maintain clear directions next to the object code saying where to find the Corresponding Source Regardless of what server hosts the Corresponding Source you remain obligated to ensure that it is available for as long as needed to satisfy these requirements e
281. under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation either version 3 of the License or at your option any later version This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE See the GNU General Public License for more details You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program If not see lt http www gnu org licenses gt Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail If the program does terminal interaction make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode lt program gt Copyright C lt year gt lt name of author gt This program comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY for details type show w This is free software and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions type show c for details The hypothetical commands show w and show c should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License Of course your program s commands might be different for a GUI interface you would use an about box You should also get your employer if you work as a programmer or school if any to sign a copyright disclaimer for the program if necessary For more information on this and how to apply and follow the GNU GPL see lt http www gnu org li
282. une a digital channel You can however adjust your antenna to improve the reception of available digital channels Ifthe signal strength meter indicates that the signal is weak physically adjust your antenna to increase the signal strength Continue to adjust the antenna until you find the best position with the strongest signal Software Upgrade Samsung may offer upgrades for the TV s firmware in the future These upgrades can TV Side Panel be performed via the TV when it is connected to the Internet or by downloading the new firmware from samsung com to a USB memory device Current Version is the software already installed in the TV Gaal i Alternative Software Backup shows the previous version that will be replaced or Software is represented as Year Month Day_Version The more recent the date the newer the software version Installing the latest version is recommended By USB Insert a USB drive containing the firmware upgrade downloaded from samsung com into the Software Upgrade TV Please be careful to not disconnect the power or remove the USB drive while upgrades are being applied The TV will turn off and turn on automatically after completing the firmware Gn USB Drive i upgrade Please check the firmware version after the upgrades are complete the new version will have a higher number than the older version By Online Alternative Software 2009 01 16_000000
283. unt Kit while your TV is turned on It may result in personal injury due to electric shock English 64 El Anti Theft Kensington Lock The product color and shape may vary depending on the model The Kensington Lock is a device used to physically fix the system when using it in a public place The appearance and locking method may differ from the illustration depending on the manufacturer Refer to the manual provided with the Kensington Lock for proper use The locking device has to be purchased separately 4 The location of the Kensington Lock may depending on its model 1 Insert the locking device into the Kensington slot on the LCD TV and turn it in the locking direction Connect the Kensington Lock cable Fix the Kensington Lock to a desk or a heavy stationary object a Securing the Installation Space Keep the required distances between the product and other objects e g walls to ensure proper ventilation Failing to do so may result in fire or a problem with the product due to an increase in the internal temperature of the product Install the product so the required distances shown in the figure are kept When using a stand or wall mount use parts provided by Samsung Electronics only e f you use parts provided by another manufacturer it may result in a problem with the product or an injury due to the product falling e Ifyou use parts provided by another manufac
284. uration 20 m R glage de l horloge T23 m Connexion au r seau 00 m Configuration du r seau 9 ENTR E SUPPORT TECHNIQUE m Menu Input 2 30 m Support technique 100 MEDIA PLAY USB m Connecting a USB Device 39 m Fonction Media Play m Classement de la liste des photos m Options du menu Liste des photos m Lecture d une photo ou d un diaporama m Options du menu Diaporama m Classement de la liste de musique m Options du menu Liste de fichiers musicaux m Lecture musicale 48 m Options du menu Lecture de la musique m Classement de la liste des films m Options du menu Liste des films m Lecture d un fichier film m Options du menu Lecture de film m Utilisation du menu Setup ANYNET m Branchement d appareils Anynet m Configuration de la fonction Anynet m Permutation entre appareils Anynet mEnegistement m a Se m coute par l interm diaire d un r cepteur cha ne de cin ma maison 57 m D pannage de la fonction Anynet 58 INFOLINK m Utilisation du service InfoLink m Utilisation de l objet Weather Service m Utilisation de l objet News Service m Utilisation de l objet Stock Service m Configuration d InfoLink RECOMMANDATIONS m D pannage m Installation du support m Retrait du support mAssemblage des cables m Sp cifications de l ensemble d installation murale VESA m Utilisation du verrou antivol Kensington m S curisation de l
285. ure uonesnBiyuog R glage du r seau Mode horloge V Chip Vous pouvez r gler l heure manuellement ou automatiquement Hi ASA e Auto Permet de r gler l heure automatiquement en utilisant l heure du signal de diffusion num rique gt e Manuel Permet de r gler l heure manuellement selon une heure particuli re Mise en veille of En fonction de la station de diffusion et du signal il est possible que la fonction de r glage automatique de l heure ne fonctionne pas correctement Le cas ch ant r glez l horloge manuellement L antenne ou le c ble doit tre branch pour que le r glage automatiquement de l horloge se fasse D pl Cintre D Retour R glage Horloge l est possible de r gler l heure manuellement Cette fonction n est disponible que lorsque la fonction Mode horloge est r gl e Manuel Vous pouvez r gler directement le mois le jour les heures et les minutes en appuyant sur les touches num riques de la t l commande Fuseau hor Choisissez votre fuseau horaire Cette fonction n est disponible que lorsque la fonction Mode horloge est r gl e Auto DST Daylight Saving Time Off On Auto Permet d activer et de d sactiver la fonction de l heure avanc e Cette fonction n est disponible que lorsque la fonction Mode horloge est r gl e Auto Fran ais 28 Q Mise en veille La mise en veille teint automatiquement le t l viseur apr s le d lai choisi 30 6
286. ure and the images are constantly moving Displaying stationary graphics and images on screen such as the dark sidebars on nonexpanded standard format television video and programming should be limited to no more than 5 of the total television viewing per week Additionally viewing other stationary images and text such as stock market reports video game displays station logos web sites or computer graphics and patterns should be limited as described above for all televisions Displaying stationary images that exceed the above guidelines can cause uneven aging of LCD Displays that leave subtle but permanent burned in ghost images in the LCD picture To avoid this vary the programming and images and primarily display full screen moving images not stationary patterns or dark bars On LCD models that offer picture sizing features use these controls to view different formats as a full screen picture Be careful in the selection and duration of television formats used for viewing Uneven LCD aging as a result of format selection and use as well as burned in images are not covered by your Samsung limited warranty e U S A Only The product unit accompanying this user manual is licensed under certain intellectual property rights of certain third parties In particular this product is licensed under the following US patents 5 991 715 5 740 317 4 972 484 5 214 678 5 323 396 5 539 829 5 606 618 5 530 655 5 777 992 6 289 308 5 610 985 5 481 643 5
287. ute copies of free software and charge for them if you wish that you receive source code or can get it if you want it that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs and that you know you can do these things To protect your rights we need to prevent others from denying you these rights or asking you to surrender the rights Therefore you have certain responsibilities if you distribute copies of the software or if you modify it responsibilities to respect the freedom of others For example if you distribute copies of such a program whether gratis or for a fee you must pass on to the recipients the same freedoms that you received You must make sure that they too receive or can get the source code And you must show them these terms so they know their rights Developers that use the GNU GPL protect your rights with two steps 1 assert copyright on the software and 2 offer you this License giving you legal permission to copy distribute and or modify it For the developers and authors protection the GPL clearly explains that there is no warranty for this free software For both users and authors sake the GPL requires that modified versions be marked as changed so that their problems will not be attributed erroneously to authors of previous versions Some devices are designed to deny users access to install or run modified versions of the software inside them although the manufacturer can do so Thi
288. uto Motion Plus 120Hz off Clear Sets Auto Motion Plus 120Hz to minimum Standard Sets Auto Motion Plus 120Hz to medium Smooth Sets Auto Motion Plus 120Hz to maximum Custom Adjusts the blur and judder reduction level to suit your preference Blur Reduction Adjusts the blur reduction level from video sources Judder Reduction Adjusts the judder reduction level from video sources when playing films Reset Reset the custom settings e Demo Displays the difference between Auto Motion Plus 120Hz on and off modes Picture Reset Reset Picture Mode Cancel Resets all picture settings to the default values Reset Picture Mode Current picture values return to default settings English 19 il Viewing Picture in Picture You can use the PIP feature to simultaneously watch the TV tuner and one external video Melody Medium Energy Saving Off source This product has one built in tuner which does not allow PIP to function in the same mode Please see PIP Settings below for details az Press the TOOLS button to display the Tools menu You can also configure PIP related settings by selecting Tools PIP Ifyou select the PIP picture sound refer to the Configuring the Sound Menu instructions see page 24 PIP Settings Main picture Sub picture Component 1 2 HDMI1 DVI HDMI2 HDMI3 HDMI4 TV PC S While V Chip is in operation the PIP function cannot be used If you turn
289. utton 2 Press the lt or gt button to select Photo then press the ENTER C button Press the lt or button to select the desired photo file Selecting Multiple Photos Press the lt or button to select the desired photo file Then press the Yellow button Repeat the above operation to select multiple photo files The mark Y appears to the selected photo file 4 Press the TOOLS button amp The option menu changes according to the current status Q Slide Show Using this menu you can play a SlideShow using the photo files on the USB memory device D Play Current Group Using this menu you can play a SlideShow using only the photo files in the currently selected sorting group D Change Group Info When the Sort key is the Color You can change a selected photo file s or group of files Color information in order to move it from one Color group to another This does not change the actual Color of the photo The group information of the current file is updated and the photos are moved to the new Color group To change the information of multiple files select the files you want by pressing the Yellow button Q Deselect All When at least one file is selected You can deselect all files The Y mark indicating the corresponding file is selected is hidden Q Information The photo file information including the name the size the resolution the date modified and the path is displayed r
290. uvent varier selon le statut du canal Ajouter aux favoris coute par minuterie Ajouter supprimer est possible d ajouter ou de supprimer un canal afin d afficher seulement les canaux d sir s v eerte Ie nom ducal Tous les canaux supprim s sont affich s dans le menu Tous les canaux ree ae Un canal affich en gris indique que celui ci a t supprim Le menu Ajouter ne s affiche que pour les canaux supprim s Il est galement possible de supprimer un canal du menu Canaux ajout s ou Favori z 2 da 8 5 z 2 5 B 2 B 2 Frangais 14 Ajouter aux favoris Effacer des favoris Vous pouvez d finir comme favoris les canaux que vous regardez fr quemment A Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils Il est galement possible d ajouter ou de supprimer des canaux dans la liste des favoris en s lectionnant Outils Ajouter aux favoris ou Effacer des favoris Le symbole s affiche et le canal est d fini comme canal favori Tous les canaux supprim s sont affich s dans le menu Favori coute par minuterie Si vous r servez une mission couter le t l viseur passe automatiquement au canal r serv dans la liste des canaux m me si un autre canal est cout Pour r server une mission r gler d abord l horloge Seuls les canaux m moris s peuvent tre r serv s amp Il est possible de r gler directement le canal le jour le mois l ann e l heure
291. vation d mission Choisir tout Annuler horaires S lectionnez cette option pour annuler une r servation d mission Information S lectionnez cette option pour afficher une r servation d mission Il est galement possible de modifier l information relative une mission Choisir tout Permet de s lectionner toutes les missions r serv es Fran ais 15 Vous pouvez configurer divers options d image telles que le mode le rapport de forme et les couleurs de l image afin de l adapter a vos pr f rences ll Configuration du menu Image Q Mode Vous pouvez choisir le type d image qui correspond le mieux vos exigences A Appuyez sur la touche TOOLS pour afficher le menu Outils Il est galement possible de r gler l image en choisissant Outils Image mode Mode Standard Contre jour Contraste Luminosit Dynamique Ez Choisit l image offrant une meilleure d finition dans une pi ce claire Teinte V R R glag Standard Choisit la meilleure image possible dans un environnement normal Naturel S lectionne une qualit d image optimale qui r duit la fatigue visuelle Naturel n est pas disponible en mode PC Movie Choisit une d finition d image pour regarder des films dans une pi ce sombre Q Contre jour Contraste Luminosit Nettet Couleur Teinte V R Le t l viseur offre plusieurs options de r glage de la qualit de l image Untied eS Contre jour R gle la
292. vez modifier la police La valeur par d faut est Style 0 e Couleur avant plan Cette option permet de choisir entre Par d faut Blanc Noir Rouge Vert Bleu Jaune Magenta et Cyan Vous pouvez modifier la couleur des caract res La couleur par d faut est Blanc e Couleur arri re plan Cette option permet de choisir entre Par d faut Blanc Noir Rouge Vert Bleu Jaune Magenta et Cyan Vous pouvez modifier la couleur de l arri re plan des sous titres La couleur par d faut est Noir e Opacit avant plan Cette option vous permet de choisir entre Par d faut Transparent Translucide Opaque et Luminescence Vous pouvez modifier l opacit des caract res Fran ais 27 e Opacit arri re plan Cette option vous permet de choisir entre Par d faut Transparent Translucide Opaque et Clignotant Vous pouvez modifier l opacit de l arri re plan des sous titres Retour par d faut Cette option r tablit les param tres par d faut des fonctions suivantes Format Style de police Couleur d avant plan Couleur d arri re plan Opacit d avant plan et Opacit d arri re plan Options de sous titrage num rique sont accessibles uniquement lorsque les options Par d faut et Service1 Service6 peuvent tre s lectionn es en Mode ss titres cod s L option de sous titrage disponible d pend de l mission diffus e Par d faut correspond la configuration standard choisie par le diffuseur Lavant plan et l arri re plan
293. wers under the age of 14 18 Adult programming Z The V Chip will automatically block any category that is More restrictive For example if you block G category then PG 14 and 18 will automatically be blocked also Se en ere ee Canadian French G General 8 anst Programming generally considered acceptable for children 8 years and over to watch on their own 13 ans Programming may not be suitable for children under the age of 13 16 ans Programming is not suitable for children under the age of 16 18 ans Programming restricted to adults Z The V Chip will automatically block any category that is More restrictive For example if you block 8 ans category then 13 ans 16 ans and 18 ans will automatically be blocked also wes e 2 8 English 26 Downloadable U S Rating The number of all rating information Parental restriction information can be used while watching DTV channels Rating ttle If information is not downloaded from the broadcasting station the Downloadable U S Downloadable U S Rating rating menu is deactivated a l Parental restriction information is automatically downloaded while watching DTV channels It may take several seconds The Downloadable U S rating menu is available for use after information is H a The number of current rating information Humor Level gt 12 Allow All Block All downloaded from the broadcasting station However depending
294. whatever licenses to the work the party s predecessor in interest had or could give under the previous paragraph plus a right to possession of the Corresponding Source of the work from the predecessor in interest if the predecessor has it or can get it with reasonable efforts You may not impose any further restrictions on the exercise of the rights granted or affirmed under this License For example you may not impose a license fee royalty or other charge for exercise of rights granted under this License and you may not initiate litigation including a cross claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit alleging that any patent claim is infringed by making using selling offering for sale or importing the Program or any portion of it Patents A contributor is a copyright holder who authorizes use under this License of the Program or a work on which the Program is based The work thus licensed is called the contributor s contributor version A contributor s essential patent claims are all patent claims owned or controlled by the contributor whether already acquired or hereafter acquired that would be infringed by some manner permitted by this License of making using or selling its contributor version but do not include claims that would be infringed only as a consequence of further modification of the contributor version For purposes of this definition control includes the right to grant patent sublicenses in a manner co
295. with an implementation available to the public in source code form and must require no special password or key for unpacking reading or copying Additional Terms Additional permissions are terms that supplement the terms of this License by making exceptions from one or more of its conditions Additional permissions that are applicable to the entire Program shall be treated as though they were included in this License to the extent that they are valid under applicable law If additional permissions apply only to part of the Program that part may be used separately under those permissions but the entire Program remains governed by this License without regard to the additional permissions When you convey a copy of a covered work you may at your option remove any additional permissions from that copy or from any part of it Additional permissions may be written to require their own removal in certain cases when you modify the work You may place additional permissions on material added by you to a covered work for which you have or can give appropriate copyright permission Notwithstanding any other provision of this License for material you add to a covered work you may if authorized by the copyright holders of that material supplement the terms of this License with terms 10 11 a Disclaiming warranty or limiting liability differently from the terms of sections 15 and 16 of this License or b Requiring preserv
296. y connected Check the Anynet device s Video Audio HDMI 1 3 cable connections Check whether Anynet HDMI CEC is set to On in the Anynett setup menu Check whether the TV remote control is in TV mode Check whether it is Anynet exclusive remote control Anynet doesn t work in certain situations Searching channels Operating Media Play Plug amp Play etc When connecting or removing the HDMI 1 3 cable please make sure to search devices again or turn your TV off and on again Check if the Anynet Function of Anynett device is set on want to start Anynet Check if the Anynet device is properly connected to the TV and check if the Anynet HDMI CEC is set to On in the Anynet Setup menu Press the TV button on the TV remote control to switch to TV Then press the TOOLS button to show the Anynet menu and select a menu you want want to exit Anynett The message Connecting to Anynet device appears on the screen The Anynet device does not play Select View TV in the Anynet menu Press the SOURCE button on the TV remote control and select a device other than Anynet devices Press V CH A CH LIST PRE CH and FAV CH to change the TV mode Note that the channel button operates only when a tuner embedded Anynet device is not connected You cannot use the remote control when you are configuring Anynett or switching to a view mode Use the remote control when the Anynet setting or switch

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Page 1 Page 2 概 説 本装置。T-920/820は、発電機方式に対応する  AL320C-EVB-A0 User Manual  取扱説明書  Ricoh PJ WX2130  Sharkoon Silent Eagle 1000  Quasi-Linear Parabolic Reaction-Diffusion Systems: A User's Guide  Manual WS 19 - Polar Audio  Timpdon Electronics Crossing Controller Model XC1 User Manual  DPI 104-IS - GE Measurement & Control  A LA VOLETTE - Actémobazar  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file